JP6825662B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state when the gaming ball enters the starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery will be held .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

By the way, in such a game machine, it is necessary to increase the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

In view of the above points, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine of the present invention , an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. , A storage means that can store up to a specified number, a discrimination means that can perform discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means. A dynamic display means that can be dynamically displayed by the means, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege game to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. And, for the information stored in the storage means, a pre-determination means capable of executing a pre-determination before the determination by the discriminating means is executed, and a pre-discrimination means The display means for displaying the result of the pre-determination by the display means, and the display means for displaying the display mode for each result of the pre-determination. The mode is such that the display position can be changed when the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result based on the information corresponding to the display mode is started. Is the information that is determined to be the specific determination result, and the probability displayed when the information is pre-determined by the pre-determination means is different from that of the specific determination result. The first display mode set higher than the case where the determination is made, and the first information when the information is determined to be a determination result different from the specific determination result by the advance determination means. At least the second display mode and the third display mode, which are set to have a higher probability of being displayed than the display mode, are set, and the gaming machine is the specific display mode by the first display mode and the discriminating means. A display indicating that the dynamic display is started before the displayed first display mode based on the pre-determination by the pre-determination means that the information is determined to be the determination result. Based on the second display mode displayed at the position and the information that is determined by the determination means to be different from the specific determination result, that the advance determination means has determined in advance. When the third display mode displayed at the display position indicating that the dynamic display is started is displayed before the first display mode displayed in the above, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. Is started Taimi It is provided with a means capable of switching the display positions of the second display mode and the third display mode at a timing different from that of the display.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a specified number of information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions and the information acquired by the information acquisition means are obtained. A storage means that can be stored as an upper limit, a discrimination means that can perform discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. It is provided with a dynamic display means capable of causing the display means, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege game to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. Pre-discrimination means capable of executing pre-discrimination of the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, and the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. The display mode for displaying the result of the above is provided with a pre-display means capable of causing the display means to display each result of the pre-determination, and the display mode displayed by the pre-display means is the display thereof. The display position can be changed when the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result based on the information corresponding to the mode is started, and the display mode is the specific. The probability displayed when the information to be determined as the determination result is pre-determined by the pre-discrimination means is different from the discrimination result and the pre-determination by the pre-discrimination means. When it is preliminarily determined by the pre-discrimination means that the information is discriminated as a discriminant result different from the specific discriminant result and the first display mode set higher than the first display mode. At least the second display mode and the third display mode, which are set with a high probability of being displayed, are set, and the game machine is discriminated from the first display mode and the specific discriminant result by the discriminating means. Based on the fact that the information is pre-determined by the pre-determination means, the information is displayed at a display position indicating that the dynamic display is started before the displayed first display mode . It is displayed based on the second display mode and the information that is determined to be different from the specific determination result by the determination means, which is determined in advance by the advance determination means . Timing when the dynamic display of the identification information is started when the third display mode displayed at the display position indicating that the dynamic display is started is displayed before the first display mode. Different timing It is provided with a means capable of switching the display positions of the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be satisfactorily increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. (A) is a perspective view when the distribution winning device is viewed from the front, and (b) is a top view of the distribution winning device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electric composition in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a main control device. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st hold area. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol winning / failing table storage area, (a) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a low probability mode, and (b) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a high probability mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the distribution table, (a) shows the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the 1st result display part, (b) is the distribution for the 2nd result display part. The table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed in the main MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure special electric address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure change executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a special electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of a special electric power | execution which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power termination processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice which is executed in the main MPU and is triggered by the winning of a prize to the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice which is executed in the main MPU and is triggered by the winning of a prize to the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command with the winning of a prize to the 1st start port executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control processing which is executed in the main MPU. Fuzu This is a diagram for explaining the Fuden address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main command correspondence processing following FIG. 37. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area of the voice side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which is executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effective lottery process executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which is executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the other correspondence processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a figure which shows the display screen when the operation notification command is received. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen. It is a figure which shows the display screen, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen before the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b)-(d) show the transition state after winning the replacement lottery. .. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area of the voice side RAM in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which the voice side MPU executes in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effective lottery process executed by the voice side MPU in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which the voice side MPU executes in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command triggered by the winning of a prize to the 1st start port executed by the main MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the reserved symbol to be displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display area of the symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which the voice side MPU executes in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in the 2nd modification of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the upper display area of the symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice triggered by the winning of a prize to the 1st start port executed by the main MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which a voice side MPU executes in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in the state which both the reserved symbol about the lottery game in a high probability mode and the reserved symbol about a lottery game in a low probability mode are displayed in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. Indicates the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 5th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the symbol display device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen which both the character symbol of a boy and the character symbol of a girl are displayed, and (b) is the display screen after replacement. Shown. It is a figure which shows the effect displayed in the upper display area of the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which the voice side MPU executes in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which the voice side MPU executes in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display screen of the modification of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the modification of 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the state which the character symbol of the 1st and 2nd girls is displayed in the support zone, and (b) is The character symbol of 2 girls shows the winning state. It is a front view of the game board in 7th Embodiment of this invention. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing a display mode of a display screen in another embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing a display mode of a display screen in another embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing a display mode of a display screen in another embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In each of the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equal to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First Embodiment)
An example of applying the first embodiment of the present invention to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which the main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front of the eleven. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment in the game hall.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It has 15 doors. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (open / close) with respect to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (other with respect to the rotation center) in front view. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so that it can rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 is locked so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the rotation tip side thereof, and the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of putting 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 having a substantially rectangular opening in a substantially central portion. Has been done. A window panel 22 having two colorless and transparent flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front door frame 14, and the front surface (game area) of the game board 43, which will be described later, is the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side of. The window panel 22 may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, instead of flat glass.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 protruding in front of the front door frame 14 below the window portion 21. Are lined up and down. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, and the game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening is inclined downward toward the right side when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is charged (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to the game ball launching mechanism 44 described later.

Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operating means) at a substantially central portion of the upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened), and is in front of the first frame button 26. A second frame button 27 (operating means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated in the symbol display device 80, which will be described later, when the stage (background) to be displayed is changed, the chance-up effect of the reach effect to be displayed, or the effect of the notice character is displayed. To. Further, the first frame button 26 is operated by the player when an opportunity to replace the displayed reserved symbols occurs. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, the amount of light, or the like controlled by the voice lamp control device 92 described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape in the top view, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape in the top view. However, the shapes of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 Can be changed as appropriate.

The stage is a production (background) mode in which the production displayed on the symbol display device 80 is unified. In this pachinko machine 10, the “underwater stage”, “beach stage”, and “city stage” are used. There are three stages. Then, various productions such as reach production, which will be described later, are set so as to be productions according to the theme corresponding to each stage. Further, the stage can be changed by the player operating the first frame button 22 during a period during which the fluctuation display is not performed and a predetermined period during which the fluctuation display is performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later. This is performed, and each time the first frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side of the front view from the second frame button 27. As a result, when the ball lending button 28 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 28 is operated in response to the operation. The rental ball is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. As a result, it is possible to standardize a pachinko machine (CR machine) using a card unit and a cash machine.

Inside the lower bulging portion 24, a lower plate 30 is provided which opens upward like the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 provided in the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 30 when viewed from the front. .. Inside the operation handle 31, a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is being touched by the player, and a game ball even in a situation where the player is rotating the operation handle 31. It has a built-in push-button type stop switch 31b for stopping firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electrical resistance. Then, when the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 31 The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43 described later with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball pulling lever 32 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 30 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 30 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower plate 30. The ball pulling lever 32 is usually arranged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. It is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 32 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

Further, the front door frame 14 is provided with an illumination unit 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED around the window unit 21, and a pair of speaker units 34 are provided at both left and right ends above the window unit 21. It is equipped. In the pachinko machine 10, each illumination unit 33 lights up or blinks at the time of hitting or reaching, to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. By notifying that the player is hitting or reaching, the effect of the effect during the game is enhanced. In addition, the illumination unit 33 also functions as an error lamp that blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 35 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illuminated portion 33.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the central portion of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. A game board 43 shown in FIG. 5 is detachably attached to the resin base 41, and a game ball launching mechanism 44 for firing a game ball to a front region of the game board 43 is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and launches the launch rail 45 extending toward the induction rail described later and the game ball stored in the upper plate 25 on the launch rail 45. The ball feeding device 46 is provided with a ball feeding device 46, and a launch solenoid 47, which is an electric actuator that launches a game ball supplied on the launch rail 45 toward the guide rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is launched.

Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, an inner rail 51, an outer rail 52, a general winning opening 53, and a first starting opening on the front surface of a wooden base plate 50 cut into a substantially rectangular shape in the front view. (1st start ball entry section) 54, 2nd start port (2nd start ball entry section) 55, variable winning device 56, normal symbol start gate 57, variable display device unit 58, etc. are assembled and configured. (See FIG. 6 for the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55). The general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol starting gate 57, and the variable display device unit 58 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 43 with wood screws or the like. The peripheral portion of such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the central portion of the front surface can be visually recognized via the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. There is.

On the back side of the game board 43, the detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, corresponding to the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, and the ordinary symbol starting gate 57, respectively. 56c and 57a (see FIG. 10) are provided. Then, when a ball enters the general winning opening 53, the first and second starting ports 54, 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, the ball entry is detected by the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection result is obtained. It is output to the main control device 91, which will be described later. As the detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the entry of the game ball.

Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. Will be done.
In the present embodiment, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 53, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 56, 15 game balls are paid out. When the payout is executed and the balls enter the first and second starting ports 54 and 55, the payout of three game balls is executed. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls for entering the first starting port 54 may be larger than the number of prize balls for entering the second starting port 55. .. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 56 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls. For example, the number of winning balls for winning the variable winning device 56 is the general winning opening 53. The number of prize balls may be less than the number of prize balls for entering the ball.

The inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 form a guide rail and a game ball launching mechanism. The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, a resin connecting member 59 connecting between the lower right tip of the inner rail 51 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 52 is arranged in front view. There is. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 51, the outer rail 52, and the connecting member 59, and is an area in which the game is played according to the behavior of the game ball (launched game ball). The area where is flowing down).

A return ball prevention member 60 is attached to the tip side of the inner rail 51 (upper left portion in FIG. 5), and the game ball once launched to the upper part (game area) of the game board 43 is guided by the guide rail (inner rail 51). It is possible to suppress the return to the inside (the area between the outer rail 52 and the outer rail 52). A return rubber 61 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 61. , The momentum is being dampened and bounced back toward the center.

At the lower center of the front view of the game board 43, a distribution winning device 62 having first and second starting ports 54 and 55 inside and guiding the game ball to the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 is provided. It is provided. Here, the configuration of the distribution winning device 62 will be described. FIG. 6A is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 62 when viewed from the front, and FIG. 6B is a top view of the distribution winning device 62.

As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the distribution winning device 62 is provided with an electric accessory 63 at the upper opening (ball entry port). In the normal state (low probability mode, low frequency support mode), the electric accessory 63 has an interval at which the blades 63a and 63b facing each other can insert about one game ball (the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm). ) Is placed in an upright position. That is, in the normal state (the state in which the blades 63a and 63b are in an upward standing state and the electric accessory 63 is in the closed state), the ball entry route into the distribution winning device 62 is the blade of the electric accessory 63. Only the route passes between 63a and 63b, and the player first launches the game ball so as to pass the game ball between the blades 63a and 63b of the electric accessory 63.

Further, in the distribution winning device 62, in addition to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, a passive distribution unit 64a (first passive unit) and an accommodation unit 64b (second passive unit) are provided. A member (game ball guiding portion) 64 is arranged, and the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 are arranged apart from each other below the passive distribution member 64. Then, when a ball enters the distribution winning device 62 through the blades 63a and 63b, the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 64a or the accommodating portion 64b of the passive distribution member 64, and then the weight of the game ball. By rotating the passive distribution member 64, the game ball is guided to the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55. For example, when the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 64a, the passive distribution member 64 rotates counterclockwise (second direction) in the front view (see FIG. 6A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball. Is guided to the first starting port 54. Similarly, when the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 64b, the passive distribution member 64 rotates clockwise (first direction) in the front view due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the second starting port 55. To induce. Each of the passive distribution members 64 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, and a magnet (rotation regulating means) 64c is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 64a and the accommodating portion 64b. ..

Further, a base body 65 is provided on the back side of the distribution winning device 62, and the base body 65 has a base side magnet (a position corresponding to a position on the center line between the blades 63a and the blades 63b). Rotation regulating means) 65a is arranged. The polarity of the passive distribution member 64 on the magnet 64c side of the base side magnet 65a and the polarity of the base side magnet 65a on the magnet 64c side repel each other. Specifically, the magnet 64c is composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip portion on the base body 65 side. Similarly, the base side magnet 65a is composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip end portion on the passive distribution member 64 side.

Therefore, when the passive distribution member 64 rotates, the base side magnet 65a and the passive are passive at a position where the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 64a and the accommodating portion 64b comes directly above (on the center line of the interval between the blades 63a and 63b facing each other). The magnets 64c of the distribution member 64 are at the closest positions (the tips face each other), but the magnets 64c and 65a are arranged so that they have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole). Therefore, the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 64 does not stop at a position facing directly upward, and is maintained at a position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, in the passive distribution member 64, the magnet 64c and the base side magnet 65a repel each other, so that the passive distribution member 64 rotates to the left or right, and the magnet 64c is the blade 63a and the blade 63b of the electric accessory 63. It becomes difficult to reach a position on the center line between and (upward position). That is, either the accommodating portion 64a or the accommodating portion 64b faces the side (upper side of the pachinko machine 10) that receives the game ball entering the distribution winning device 62. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 64a and the accommodating portion 64b and causing ball clogging.

Further, when the magnet 64c and the base side magnet 65a repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 64a receives the game ball, rotates about 90 degrees to the left, guides the game ball to the first starting port 54, and then passively shakes the ball. It is possible to prevent the component member 64 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 64a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first starting port 54, the accommodating portion 64b is in a state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball that has entered the distribution winning device 62 is received by the accommodating portion 64b. Due to the weight of the game ball, the passive distribution member 64 rotates about 90 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second starting port 55. In this way, the passive distribution member 64 can alternately guide the game ball entering the distribution winning device 62 to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55. Therefore, the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 to enter the ball, and the lottery game (first) triggered by the entry into the first start port 54, which will be described later. The lottery game) and the lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by entering the ball into the second starting port 55 can be efficiently and alternately executed.

In the above description, the distribution winning device 62 has a mechanical configuration (a distribution configuration of the game ball by the passive distribution member 64), but each time the game ball wins a prize, the first lottery game is started. And may be configured to be alternately distributed to the start opportunity of the second lottery game. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide the game board 43 with a mechanism for distributing the game balls, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 57 is provided on the left side of the center of the front view of the game board 43. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the passage (entry ball) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 10), and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. Will be done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the main control device 91, which will be described later, determines whether or not the normal symbol hits (determines whether or not the electric accessory 63 is opened). Then, when the determination result is a hit (winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory drive unit 63c (see FIG. 10) is driven to open the electric accessory 63. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the distribution winning device 62. That is, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55.

As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are installed, and during the high probability mode, the hit probability of a normal symbol is increased and the electric accessory 63 is likely to be in an open state. It has become. Therefore, in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is more advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63, so that the game ball has a symbol. The game ball is launched so as to pass through the left side of the display device 80 (so-called left-handed).

The variable winning device 56 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 43, and includes a large winning opening 56a leading to the back side of the game board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b covering the large winning opening 56a, and a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b. It is configured to have a variable winning drive unit 56d (see FIG. 10) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 56b forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate 56b. The large winning opening 56a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Then, when it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (wins the winning lottery), the variable winning drive unit 56d is driven and the open / close plate 56b is tilted downward on the front surface. Then, an open state in which the game ball easily enters the large winning opening 56a is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normally closed state are alternately repeated. For example, the normally closed large winning opening 56a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are inserted). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 56 is determined by the determined hit type. For example, in the case of the 16R probability variation hit result described later, the opening / closing operation is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is given to the player as a game value (game value). The payout will be made. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the symbol display device 80 and enters the grand prize opening 56a (so-called right-handed hit). The open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a lottery for winning the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 91, which will be described later, is won, and the open / close execution mode will be described later. To do.

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are provided below the front view of the game board 43 (left and right of the distribution winning device 62). In addition, an out port 66 is provided at the lowermost part of the front view of the game board 43, so that game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area through the out openings 66. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not. In this specification, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 (large winning opening 56a) is also referred to as winning.

A sticking space 70 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space 70 is a front door frame. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of 14.

Further, a main display unit 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided in the lower left corner portion (outside of the outer rail 52) of the game board 43 in front view. The main display unit 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window unit 21 of the front door frame 14.

The main display unit 71 is based on the winning of the first result display unit 71a and the second starting port 55 showing the result of the first lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the first starting port 54. The second result display unit 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main control device 91, when the variable winning device 56 is in the open / close execution mode (or is in the open / close execution mode) by winning the winning lottery. In the case), the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode has a round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened.

Specifically, the first result display unit 71a performs a variable display regarding the first lottery game, and the variable display (blinks) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game elapses. After the display), as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the second result display unit 71b, the variation display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variation display (blinking display) is performed until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. After that, as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the second lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winning to any of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55), the variable display is displayed on the corresponding first and second result display units 71a and 71b. The period from the start to the display of the predetermined stop result and the stop of the variation display corresponds to one game (variation display). However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the period until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is regarded as one game. To do.

Further, the main display unit 71 has other display units 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display unit 71d, for example, a variable display is performed triggered by a prize in the normal symbol start gate 57, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the prize in the normal symbol start gate 57 is performed. The results are shown. Then, if the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 57 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state, the other display unit 71d displays a predetermined stop result. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 63 is in the open state, and the game ball can easily enter the distribution winning device 62. That is, in the state where the electric accessory is open, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the first and second starting ports 54 and 55.

Further, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 while the other display unit 71d is performing the variable display triggered by winning the normal symbol start gate 57, the maximum number of passages is 4 in this embodiment. It is held up to the number of times, and the number of holds is also displayed. Further, if a game ball wins a prize in the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 while the variable display is being performed in the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b, the number of winnings is determined in the present embodiment. The first starting port 54 is held up to 4 times, and the second starting port 55 is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is also displayed.

The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the number of LEDs is small depending on the combination of the emission colors. It is possible to suggest various game states of. Further, the main display unit 71 may be configured by using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The variable display device unit 58 is arranged in the center of the game board 43. The variable display device unit 58 changes and displays the first special symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first result display unit 71a to display the lottery result of the first lottery game and changes on the second result display unit 71b. It has a symbol display device 80 that displays the lottery result of the second lottery game by varyingly displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 80. .. The center frame 81 is installed with its upper portion extending in front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 80 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display.
Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54, and the second starting opening 55 as the trigger. 2 The upper upper display area Dm for displaying the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game, and the lower lower display area Ds for displaying the reserved symbols (holding of the first lottery game and the second lottery game). have.

In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by the display control device 93 described later. Further, the symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT.

In the pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is arranged so that the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started when a prize is won in the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55. That is, when the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b performs the variable display, the symbol display device 80 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 80 presets the opening / closing execution mode for the game to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R probability variation, in which the large winning opening 56a of the variable winning device 56 is opened 16 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine types of main symbols with the numbers "1" to "9" shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (i), respectively. , The main symbol shown in FIG. 8 (j), and the sub symbol composed of the shell-shaped symbol shown in FIG. 8 (k). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of nine types of character symbols such as an octopus with numbers "1" to "9" attached to them, and a whale character symbol.

Further, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 has a predetermined main symbol and a sub symbol. It is arranged in a cyclical order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and between each main symbol. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are each composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and then the main symbol of "9" is arranged. The main symbol of "4" (or the whale character shown in FIG. 8 (j)) is additionally arranged between the main symbol of "1" and the main symbol of "1", and one sub symbol is provided between each of these main symbols. It is arranged. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, in the upper display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

Then, when the effect for the game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. The variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round ends, if the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, or , The character symbol of the whale shown in FIG. 8 (j) is statically displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the production for the game round is completed, and the hit video is displayed as the transition to the open / close execution mode (generation of the hit result). It has become so. However, the whale character symbol shown in FIG. 8 (j) in the middle symbol row Z2 is designed to stop only when a hit result occurs, and in the normal game times (out-of-game times), the whale character The main symbol of "4" is displayed in the symbol part.

As described above, the symbol display device 80 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) varies with the winning of any of the first and second start ports 54 and 55. The period from the start of the display to the display of the predetermined stop result and the stop of the variable display corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 8, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. In this lower display area Ds, in the pachinko machine 10, winnings (first lottery game or second lottery game) to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 are held up to four times, respectively. Since it is configured to hold up to eight in total, it is divided into eight small areas in the left-right direction, such as the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. In the following, the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas are also referred to as reserved symbol display areas Ds *, and * indicates the corresponding character among the numbers 1 to 8. That is, the reserved symbol display area Ds * indicates the corresponding one of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

Then, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing in the upper display area Dm, the first lottery game or the first lottery game or the first lottery game triggered by the winning. 2 The start of the lottery game is suspended, and in the display areas of the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds, the reserved symbols are not displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to The reserved symbol of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area (reserved symbol display area on the left side) Ds * having the smallest number among the Ds8.
In the present embodiment, "○" is basically displayed as the reserved symbols of the first and second lottery games. In addition, as a reserved symbol of the first and second lottery games, the player is made to detect in advance that a reach result may occur or a winning result may occur (a winning lottery may be won). ) "●" is displayed as a pending symbol. In the following, the reserved symbol "○" is also referred to as a reserved non-notification symbol (first advance notification), and the reserved symbol "●" is also referred to as a pending notification symbol (second advance notification).

Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls are sequentially distributed to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 by the distribution winning device 62 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, for example, when the first special symbol is changing and the reserved symbol is not displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to The reserved symbol of the second lottery game is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area (left reserved symbol display area) Ds1 having the smallest number among Ds8, and then the reserved symbol of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. The reserved symbols are displayed alternately with the reserved symbols of.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 9. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), a main control device 91 that controls the main control of the game and a voice lamp control device that controls the voice, the lamp display, and the like. The 92 and the display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box has a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base, and these box bases and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box joint as a (bonding means). Since the substrate boxes are inseparably connected by these box joints, the substrate box needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box is opened. In addition, for example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box can be formed by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the cover. The joining process by the box joining part prevents illegal opening after the joining, and even if illegal opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily, and once. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. Then, when the board box is opened when a defect occurs in the housed control board or when the control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box connecting portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion or the like. , Cut the connecting part between the box joint and the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box and the box cover are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw may be inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion. If the history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it is possible to easily find out whether or not the board box has been opened illegally by looking at the board box.

Further, a plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting bases of the respective control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are provided by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. The combination process is performed with and.

In addition, as a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 9, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 91, the display control device 93, and the voice lamp control device 92. There is. The back pack unit 15 includes a transparent back pack 94, and a payout mechanism portion 95 and a control device collecting unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

The payout mechanism section 95 includes a tank 97 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 connected below the tank 97 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail. It is provided at the most downstream portion of the 98, and includes a payout device 99 that pays out balls according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 10). Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 99 is discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98. Further, the payout mechanism unit 95 is equipped with, for example, a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control device collective unit 96 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99 and various control devices, and the player. It is provided with a power supply and a launch control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the operation handle 31 by the user. The payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 9, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and emission control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. There is. The state return switch 102 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 10). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The payout control device 100, the power supply and the launch control device 101 are configured by accommodating a control board or the like in a board box as in the case of each of the above control devices, and are provided with the same fraud deterrent means as described above. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at an upper corner portion on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal plate 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the tank 97 or the like runs out of game balls, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for signal output each time the player is rented, output terminal for signal output when the game machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, state transition such as opening / closing execution mode At that time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal or the like for outputting a signal is provided. Then, a signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine. In addition, each control device (each control board) has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a random number generator used in various lottery, which will be described later. A device, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 10 to 12 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 10 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 11 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91, and FIG. 12 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91. The configuration of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 is shown. In FIG. 10, the supply lines of the operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double-line arrows, and the other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid line arrows. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. In the following, the MPU 112, ROM 113, and RAM 114 of the main control device 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

The main ROM 113 is configured to use a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a and the distribution table are stored. Storage area 113b, reach table storage area 113c, variable display time table storage area 113d, stop result table storage area 113e, normal symbol hit / miss table storage area 113f, special figure special electric address table storage area 113g, normal figure general electric address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. Then, the main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 is, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electric counter area 114d, a special symbol special electric timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. It has 114f, high probability game count counter area 114g, Fuzu Fuden counter area 114h, Fuzu Fuden timer counter area 114i, various hit result flag storage area 114j, other various counter areas 114k, and other various flag storage areas 114m. ing.

In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a one-chip configuration in which the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114 are built-in, and the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. It may be a configured configuration. This also applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown), respectively. It should be noted that an input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the configuration may be such that the input port and the output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of each control device described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 112, and various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, various drive units 56d, 63c and the main. The display unit 71 is connected. First, the connection configurations with the various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, the various drive units 56d, 63c, and the main display unit 71 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

On the input side of the main MPU 112, a winning detection provided for a general winning opening 53, a first starting opening 54, a second starting opening 55, a variable winning device 56, and a normal symbol starting gate 57 in the game area. The sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a (hereinafter, collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a may be connected to each other via one electrical wiring, and a relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. It may be configured as such. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a through the winning IC 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and determines the winning of each winning portion based on the reception result. (Judgment of entry) is performed. In addition, the main MPU 112 executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and also wins a prize in the normal symbol start gate 57. Based on this, the electric accessory opening lottery (support lottery) is executed.

The winning IC 116 is a route abnormality confirmation means or a route abnormality confirmation circuit, and the winning IC 116 transmits a normal signal between the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a and the main MPU 112. Check if transmission is taking place.

Further, on the input side of the main MPU 112, in addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines the presence or absence of an abnormality targeted for each detection. To do.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 56d that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 56b of the variable winning device 56 and an electric accessory driving unit 63c that opens and closes the electric accessory 63 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is connected. Further, the main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the main MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d and the electric accessory drive unit 63c through the driver circuit, and displays the main display unit 71. Take control.

For example, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d is executed on the main MPU 112 so that the large winning opening 56a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 63 is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 63c is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 63 is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display units 71 (first and second result display units 71a, 71b) is executed on the main MPU 112. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 63 is shown, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 sets information in the main RAM 114 according to the progress of the game. Although omitted in FIG. 10, an external output terminal plate 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 signals according to the information set in the main RAM 114. The output setting is made to the external output terminal plate 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer in the game hall.

Next, the configuration in the connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before explaining the configuration in these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control device 100 will be described.

The payout control device 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 99, the payout control board 121 is equipped with an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 has a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. .. In the following, the MPU 122, ROM 123 and RAM 124 provided in the payout control device 100 will be referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123 and the payout side RAM 124.

The payout side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side MPU 122.

The payout side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 123. Then, the payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 is blocked from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting a game ball sent out to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring. Has been done. In the payout side MPU 122, the game ball is paid out by supplying a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via the driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121, and the payout is performed based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Keep track of the number of completed game balls.

Further, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 provided on the back pack unit 15 via electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 is electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. As a result, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by appropriately manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10. The payout side MPU 122 executes the ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the card unit.

Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, a fullness detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball tray is electrically connected to the payout side MPU 122. In addition, a ballless detection sensor (not shown) or the like that detects whether the tank 97 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on the communication with the main side MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

In detail about the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms that the winning portion has won the prize ball corresponding to the generation of the prize ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, the signal path is directed toward the payout side MPU 122. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted, and a first signal path SL1 is provided for transmitting the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

There are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 53 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 56 is specified, 13 are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output. To.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication in communicating the prize ball command. That is, the information of the plurality of bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to each of the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be configured by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

Further, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout status commands include a prize ball completion command indicating that the prize ball has been completed and the number of completed prize balls, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in paying out the game ball, and the predetermined value. It contains an abend command that indicates that the error has been cleared. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of its own command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as a plurality of bits of information. The predetermined abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a state without a ball in the tank 97.

In communicating the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, the configuration is such that the information of the plurality of bits included in the payout status command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be configured by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout side MPU 121 to the main side MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112 in order for the main side MPU 112 to grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

The payout permission signal consists of 1-bit information. When the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, the LOW level signal is transmitted, and when the output of the prize ball command is permitted, the HI level signal is transmitted. To. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and the LOW level signal is output when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. It may be configured to be.

The third signal path SL3 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be configured by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

In this way, the command communication between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is serial communication instead of parallel communication, so that the electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 can be used. On the other hand, even if a fraudulent act using a so-called hanging board for connecting an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden by electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned illegal boards are used. It is easy to hide due to electrical wiring. On the other hand, since the command communication is performed by serial communication, it becomes difficult for the illegal board to be hidden in the electrical wiring, and it becomes easy to find the board if it is temporarily installed.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control device 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100. A power supply circuit 142 having the power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power supply unit 143 for power-on and a power supply unit 144 for power failure.

The power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, or the like is based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. The required operating voltage is generated for each, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As an outline, the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply takes in the AC 24 volt power supply supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15, and has a + 12 V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, and the like. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the main control device 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 at an intermediate position of the power supply path between the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on and the main MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply. Then, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power failure signal) to the main MPU 112 is set to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power failure has occurred. ..
The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 144 for power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. It will be charged. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply unit 144 is discharged from the power supply unit 144. As a result, storage retention power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and retained without being erased while the storage and holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure.

The capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). ..
Further, the configuration of the power supply unit 144 for power failure is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 144 for power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, the power supply and the emission control board 141 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power failure. In the power supply and emission control board 141, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, it is controlled for a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the system, at a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

Here, a configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 will be described.

The electric power from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCS terminal of the payout side MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to the VCS terminal, various control processes are executed by the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held by the RAMs 114 and 124. Will be.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112, but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout side MPU 122. That is, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but not to the payout side RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores and holds the information, but the payout side RAM 124 does not store and hold the information. The VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or is not connected to any electrical wiring.

As described above, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but the capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is reduced by configuring the configuration so that it is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Is planned. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 147, and a launch IC 148.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal of a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a that detects that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player, and the game even in a situation where the handle portion is rotated. A stop switch 31b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the ball, is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121, and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131.

The transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the condition receives a signal from the touch sensor 31a indicating that the handle portion is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal from the stop switch 31b indicating that the player has not manually operated the handle portion. Further, when the signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, the HI level condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main side MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The firing permission receiving circuit 147 is HI-level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) and, when the launch permission signal is received, continuously supplies the corresponding signal to the launch IC 148. When the main MPU 112 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146, the main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the launch permission), but launches. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main MPU 112 newly starts transmitting the HI level launch permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed, the HI level Ends the transmission of the launch permission signal.

When the launch IC 148 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is for each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feed device 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis.
In this case, the launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and the output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the launch solenoid 47 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 45.

Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the firing IC 148 is based on the voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. Therefore, the larger the amount of operation of the operation handle 31, the stronger the firing intensity of the game ball by the firing solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

The voice lamp control device 92 includes a voice lamp control board 151, the voice lamp control board 151 is equipped with an MPU 152, and the MPU 152 has a ROM 153 and a RAM 154 built-in. In the following, the MPU 152, ROM 153 and RAM 154 provided in the voice lamp control device 92 will be described as the voice side MPU 152, the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154.

The audio side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The voice side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the voice side MPU 152. For example, the operation notification lottery table storage area 153a, the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b, and replacement. It has a lottery table storage area 153c, a command information storage area 153d, and the like.

The operation notification lottery table storage area 153a is an area in which the operation notification lottery table referred to in the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is stored.
The hold notification lottery table storage area 153b is an area in which the hold notification lottery table referred to in the hold notification lottery process (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 41), which will be described later, is stored. The replacement lottery table storage area 153c is an area in which the replacement lottery table referred to in the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) described later is stored. The command information storage area 153d is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice side MPU 152 is stored.

The audio side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the audio side ROM 153. Then, the voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The audio side RAM 154 is, for example, a command storage area 154a, a secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, an operation valid flag storage area 154c, an operation notification lottery counter area 154d, a hold notification lottery counter area 154e, a holding data area 154f, and replacement. It has a lottery counter area of 154 g, various other counter areas of 154 h, and the like.

The command storage area 154a is an area for storing commands received from the main MPU 112. The sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, which will be described in detail later, follows the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 and includes the sub-first to third-eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8. The slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8 have various flag storage areas 211 to 215 (see FIG. 40). The operation valid flag storage area 154c is an area in which the operation valid flag is stored when the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is won. The operation notification lottery counter area 154d is an area in which the operation notification lottery counter whose value is read out during the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is stored. The hold notification lottery counter area 154e is an area in which the hold notification lottery counter whose value is read out during the hold notification lottery process (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 41) described later is stored. The retained data area 154f is data that is temporarily used to execute the effect and the notification during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and even after the effect and the notification are started, the voice side MPU 152 is used. It is an area for storing and holding data for making it available independently. The replacement lottery counter area 154g is an area in which a hold notification lottery counter whose value is read out during the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) described later is stored. Other various counter areas 154h are areas in which game count counters, operation valid timer counters, and the like are stored.

Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (variation command, type command, fixed stop command, opening command, ending command, hold command, etc., which will be described later), the game times and open / close execution mode Decide the content of the production to be executed in the above. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to control the light emission of the illumination unit 33, and the sound output device 156 is controlled to control the sound of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do. Further, the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. Then, the voice side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, and when the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, the processing corresponding to the operation is executed. To do. Further, the voice side MPU 152 identifies whether or not it is necessary to perform notification based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and voice control of the voice output device 156. Notify.

The various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later, but these various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. In addition, various commands are configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information on the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

Further, the audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93, and transmits various commands including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. For various commands output from the voice side MPU 152, the command information storage area 153d of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 91 without going through the voice lamp control device 92, and the voice lamp control device is related to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side in the communication direction from 92.

The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, the display control board 161 has an MPU 162 mounted therein, and the MPU 162 has a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 built therein. Further, the display control board 161 contains a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. In the following, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display side MPU 162.

The program ROM 163 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the display side MPU 162. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when transmitting a command to the VDP 165, each effect. It has various data table storage areas 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access as well as being capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. Then, the work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a and a total hold number storage area HNX.

Then, the display side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the voice lamp control device 92, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 165). To carry out.

The VDP165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP165 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores it in the video RAM 167, so that the VDP 165 responds to the image data. The image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The character ROM 166 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. Further, the character ROM 166 has a holding image data storage area 166a in which image data for displaying in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 is stored as a part of the above data. It is set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 in the character ROM 166.

The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 167.

Further, the video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a, and the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds one-to-one with the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the symbol display device 80. The first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 are set so as to do so. Then, in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, images corresponding to the data written in the 1st to 8th unit areas RD1 to RD8 are displayed. When data is not set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 (when data meaning a blank is set), the first to eighth areas RD1 to RD8 correspond to the data. In the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, no image is displayed, or the background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning / failing lottery and the like.

At the time of the game, the main MPU 112 uses various counter information to perform a winning lottery, set the display of the main display unit 71, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 80, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the hit random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the winning type, and the reach when the symbol display device 80 disengages and fluctuates. The reach random number counter C3 used for the generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80. , The electric accessory open random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 63 is in the electric accessory open state, and the random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4. Is used.
A part of each counter is updated at an interval of 4 msec, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 17) described later. , The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. Then, a predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 is sequentially stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b in the main RAM 114. , A predetermined value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 114b has eight holding areas of the first to eighth holding areas RA1 to RA8 and one execution area RA9. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first holding area RA1. The configurations of the second to eighth reserved areas RA2 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are the same as those in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are a hit random number counter storage area 201, a hit type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and a winning start port storage area. 204, it has a flag storage area 205 per advance notification. Then, in the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8, a hit random number counter C1, a hit type counter C2, and a reach random number are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55. Each value of the counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, and is stored in the first start port 54 or the second. Information on which of the starting ports 55 the winning is won is stored in the winning starting opening storage area 204. Then, when the winning of the game ball occurs alternately and continuously for the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, the first holding area RA1 → the second holding area RA2 → the third holding area RA3 → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth reserved area RA4 → the fifth reserved area RA5 → the sixth reserved area RA6 → the seventh reserved area RA7 → the eighth reserved area RA8. By providing the eight holding areas in this way, up to eight winning histories of the game balls to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 can be stored (held storage) as a whole. It has become.

It should be noted that up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 are stored. That is, by storing up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, up to eight can be stored as a whole. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (3 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the number of items that can be stored on hold is described as 8, but the number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to 8, and is arbitrary, such as 6, 7, or 9 or more. It may be a plurality of. Further, the number that can be stored and stored may be different between the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55.

The execution area RA9 is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RA1 when starting the variable display of the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b). At the start of one game, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area R9.

The advance notification hit flag storage area 205 is notified (estimated) when it is determined (estimated) that a hit result will occur in the game times related to the hold when performing the confirmation process (FIGS. 30 and 31) for the hold notice, which will be described later. This is the area where the hit flag is stored. The flag storage area 205 for prior notification may not be provided in the execution area RA9.

Further, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, the first special symbol holding number storage area NA for storing the number of holdings of the first lottery game (the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by winning the first starting port 54). , The second special symbol hold number storage area NB that stores the hold number of the second lottery game (the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the second starting port 55), the total number of hold variable displays is stored. A total reserved number storage area NX is provided.

The first special symbol reservation number storage area NA is an area for storing the number of game balls held by winning a prize in the first start port 54, and the second special symbol reservation number storage area NB is the second start port. This is a storage area for storing the number of game balls that have been won and held in 55. The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the sum number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c is the value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) according to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57. This is a hold area for storing in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 13, the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas of the first to fourth hold areas RB1 to RB4, an execution area RB5, and a hold number storage area NC. Then, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57 are stored (held storage) by the four storage areas of the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4.

Specifically, when winning a prize to the normal symbol start gate 57 occurs continuously, the electric accessory is opened in the order of the first holding area RB1 → the second holding area RB2 → the third holding area RB3 → the fourth holding area RB4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the normal symbol start gate 57 can be stored.

The execution area RB5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first hold area RB1. Then, when the open lottery of the electric accessory 63 is performed, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RB5.

Even in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, the number that can be held and stored is not limited to 4, but is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. It may be singular.

Returning to the explanation of the counter, various counters will be described in detail.

The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Then, especially when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and counting is started again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (winning lottery) is stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a as the winning / failing information group storage means in the main ROM 113 as a special symbol winning / failing table (winning / failing information group in the given information). There is. Here, the contents of the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A and 15B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the special symbol winning / failing table in the present embodiment, FIG. 15A shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 15B shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

As shown in FIG. 15, as the special symbol winning / failing table, the special symbol winning / failing table (low-probability winning / failing information group) for the low-probability mode of FIG. 15A and the high-probability mode of FIG. The special symbol winning / failing table (high-probability winning / failing information group) is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability corresponding state) and a high probability mode (high probability corresponding state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 15A, the value of the random number winning the winning lottery ( That is, the number of winning information) is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 15B, the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (that is, winning). Information) is said to be 21 pieces. Further, in the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability mode is the winning random number counter that wins the winning lottery in the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of C1. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the given information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 113. 16A and 16B are diagrams for explaining a distribution table, in which FIG. 16A is a distribution table for the first result display unit (first distribution information group), and FIG. 16B is for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (second distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 54. Further, the distribution table for the second result display unit is a table that is referred to when the distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 55.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 16A, as the distribution destination of the game result, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" Corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, "10 to 23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation hit result, and "24" corresponds to the 16R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 16RRU) probability variation hit result. , "25, 26" corresponds to the 8R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 8RRU) probability variation hit result, and "27 to 29" corresponds to the 4R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 4RRU) probability variation hit result. ..

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 16B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0" is used as the distribution destination of the game result. "~ 15" corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, "16-23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation hit result, "24" corresponds to the 16RRU probability variation hit result, and "25, 26" It corresponds to the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and "27 to 29" corresponds to the 4RRU probability variation hit result.

Each of these game results differs only in the operation mode of the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode, and the lottery mode in the winning lottery after the opening / closing mode ends is a high probability mode (probability variation mode) regardless of the winning result. And the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode also shifts to the high frequency support mode regardless of the hit result. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are set to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode when the number of games after the open / close execution mode reaches the end specified number of times (specifically, 100 times). It is a mode with a limited number of transitions (so-called ST). As will be described later, the high-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is easy to open, and the low-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is difficult to open.

In the control of the variable winning device 56 in the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times. In addition, the round game is a condition that either a predetermined opening duration (opening duration) elapses or a predetermined maximum number of game balls wins the large winning opening 56a. It is a game that continues until it is satisfied. Further, the large winning opening 56a is opened once for a short time (specifically, 0.06 sec) and the large winning opening 56a for a long time (specifically, 0.06 sec). 30 sec) A long-time mode of opening is set.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to 10. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the maximum number of winning balls in one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening is continued for a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of winning balls in one round game, more specifically, for a time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. The time is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 56 is opened once in a long-time mode, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated for the large winning opening 56a. When the variable winning device 56 is opened once in a short time mode, it is expected that no winning will occur in the large winning opening 56a, or even if a winning occurs, the number will be about one. ..

Here, various hit results described with reference to FIG. 16 will be described. The "4R probability variation hit result" is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened four times in a long-time mode. The "16R probability variation hit result" is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. The "4RRU probability variation hit result" is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened four times in a long-time mode in the first to fourth rounds, and then the large winning opening 56a is opened 12 times in a short-time mode. is there. The "8RRU probability variation hit result" is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened eight times in a long-time mode in the first to eighth rounds, and then the large winning opening 56a is opened eight times in a short-time mode. is there. The "16RRU probability variation hit result" is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode in the first to 16th rounds. As a result, in each game result, the control mode of the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode is basically either one opening mode (opening time) or the number of opening / closing times (round number) of the large winning opening 56a. Is different. The "16R probability variation hit result" and the "16RRU probability variation hit result" are both game results in which the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long time mode in the 1st to 16th rounds, but the symbol display device. The effect displayed on the 80 is set to be different. In addition, the player can determine which game result is based on the lighting display of the main display unit 71.

Then, as described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when the winning lottery is won is the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 54 as an opportunity. It is different from the case where the lottery is won by winning the prize in the second starting port 55. Specifically, the probability of winning a 16R probability variation when winning the first starting port 54 is lower than the probability of winning a 16R probability variation when winning the second starting port 55. The 16R probability variation hit result can be said to be one of the most advantageous hit results because the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. That is, the probability that the player can get a lot of balls is higher when the player wins the prize when the second starting port 55 is won.

In this embodiment, five types of probabilistic hit results are prepared as described above, but a so-called normal hit result in which the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode after the hit result is not prepared.

Here, the "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a subsequent winning lottery is increased as an added value after the end of winning, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, open / close execution mode. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (privilege game). The high-probability mode (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state (high-frequency support mode) in which a game ball can easily win a prize at the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 by increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol. It's a waste. The "low probability mode" refers to a case where the mode is not high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is lower than in the case of the probability change. ..

Further, as a support mode in the electric accessory 63, the electric accessory 63 is in an open state per unit time when compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode or high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency support mode or low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency is relatively high or low.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric accessory open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the high-frequency support is provided. The mode has a higher probability of winning the electric accessory open state than the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electric accessory open state is won, the electric accessory 63 is opened more often in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory release state is won. It is set, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, the electric accessory is in the open state in the high-frequency support mode, and when the electric accessory 63 is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, it becomes easy for the game balls to win the first and second start ports 54 and 55, and the game balls win the first and second start ports 54 and 55 to obtain a predetermined number of games. Since the payout of balls is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric accessory open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the electric accessory is open. The probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the lottery may be equalized, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be appropriately set, and can be changed as appropriate.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and is a stop display result after the variable display in the game times in which the variable winning device 56 is in the open / close execution mode. In a game machine in which is a special display result, a variation that tends to be a special display result is likely to occur before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a display state.

Specifically, the reach display is a hit (open / close execution mode) by stopping and displaying some of the symbol strings among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may establish the combination of hit symbols corresponding to (shift to), and in that state, displays the fluctuation of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows. is there.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be used, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence. ..

More specifically, with reference to FIG. 7, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. In, the main symbol having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the number "3" in the upper symbol row Z1 and the number "1" in the lower symbol row Z3 of the effective line L2 is stopped and displayed. By doing so, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row) in the middle row, so that the reach display is obtained. Then, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, or "3" and "1" are displayed. The whale character shown in FIG. 8 (j) is stopped and displayed on the reach line between the main symbols with the numbers, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is completed.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 80a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS has a variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) and a variation display time (display duration) of the symbol in the symbol display device 80. ) Is used to determine in the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 71 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 80. Then, when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. ..

The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Then, when the electric accessory open random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the count is counted again from the initial value. It will be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57.

The value of the random number that wins the normal symbol is stored as the normal symbol win / loss table (win / fail information group) in the normal symbol win / fail table storage area 113f as the win / loss information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values for winning a normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high probability mode, it is set to 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the low probability mode, when the value of the acquired electric accessory release random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric accessory release random number counter If the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined to be a winner. Then, a predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display unit 71d of the main display unit 71, and the blades 63a and 63b of the electric accessory 63 are opened.

<About various processes executed by MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the power is turned on to the main control device 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait processing, the wait processing (for example, peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) is waited for the sub-side control devices (voice lamp control device 92, display control device 93, payout control device 100, and the like) to become operable. 1 sec) is executed, and the process waits without proceeding to the next process. Then, after the power-on wait processing period has elapsed, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

After that, when it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and firing control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105: YES), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (S106), and the checksum is used as the power supply. It is determined whether or not the checksum is the same as the checksum saved at the time of blocking, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

Then, when it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), the power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set to the initial value, and the current gaming state (the state before the power-off is normal if the power-off is normal). A command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92 in order to recognize. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that "1" is not set in the power failure flag (S105: NO), or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), after clearing the main RAM 114 as the initialization of the main RAM 114 (S108), the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 103. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to the process of S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to the same step 108.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 103 is not pressed, the step 108 is not executed on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Execute 109. That is, if the power off is normal and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the gaming state of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92.

After that, the process proceeds to the following residual processing. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) described later, but a residual time is generated between a certain timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time will fluctuate according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the following residual processing is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following residual processing is irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 114, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, an interrupt enable setting for switching from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process of steps 110 to 113 is executed.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are only set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt enable processing. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing Is always started immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of the predetermined data in the main MPU 112, the main data stored in the register of the main MPU 112 at that time is stored at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the save process to the side RAM 114, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return process to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 112 on a regular basis (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 112 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of this pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer changes from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of is absorbed by the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 first executes the power failure information storage process (S201). In this power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 117, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a predetermined power failure time process is executed.

Next, the lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 17) (S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 17) (S203). S204). Next, the game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 10) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the game machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not the act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by the fraud detection process (S212) described later, and detects the radio wave. It is determined whether or not an illegal radio wave is output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the sensor, and an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. Judge whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made by any of these fraud determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and if it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. Process is executed (S207). In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command is set as the output target when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the execution setting of the notification corresponding to the content of the specific event is performed. In addition, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the corresponding notification are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is supplied. By starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and the firing control device 101 after stopping, the main RAM is not executed when the initialization of the main RAM is executed. Become.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the output processing corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the large winning opening 56a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output is started. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 63c is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the voice lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

Next, the reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Subsequently, it is received from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a that detect the winning of the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. The winning signal is read, and the winning detection process for specifying whether or not the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57 has been won is executed (S210). ).

After that, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if a fraud determination is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined event has occurred and a positive determination is made, the game is played in step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Make settings for stopping. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 206. As described in step 205, the predetermined event is whether or not the act of bringing the magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and the illegal radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not, whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued for the operation handle 31. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, the input for confirming the disconnection of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, confirming the opening of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 and the like. A state monitoring process is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when it is confirmed that the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a are disconnected, or when the opening of the game machine main body 12 is confirmed, the notification is given in the same manner as in step 207. Executes command output processing. In the output processing of the notification command, a notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a are disconnected and a notification command indicating that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state are transmitted. Send. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If a positive judgment is made in these judgments, a notification command corresponding to the judgment is set as an output target.

Next, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times (variable display times) and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 63 is performed. The general electric control process is executed (S216). The special figure special electric control process in step 215 and the normal figure general electric control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

Subsequently, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps 215 and 216, the number of reserved information (first and second special symbol reserved number storage areas NA, NB) for winning the first and second starting ports 55 is increased or decreased. , And display control processing (setting of output information) for reflecting the increase / decrease number of hold information (hold number storage area NC) for winning a prize at the normal symbol start gate 57 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). (S217). Further, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the number of times the variable winning device 56 in the open / close execution mode is opened is reflected in the round display unit 71c based on the round setting process (FIG. 26, S802) described later. Perform display control processing (setting of output information) to make it. Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (turning off) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display is executed (S218). The demo display process will be described in detail later.

Then, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout side MPU 122 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

Next, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external output terminal plate 104 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. The external information setting process is executed (S221).

After finishing the external processing information setting processing in step 221 or the output processing of the notification command in step 207, the interrupt end declaration setting is executed (S222). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. In step 222, the next Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the execution of timer interrupt processing. Next, the interrupt permission is set (S223). Once the timer interrupt process is started, the main MPU 112 is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step 223, the interrupt enable is set so that the next timer interrupt process can be executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, the special figure special electric control process (S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 is won, the process for acquiring the hold information is executed, and when the hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the held information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the pass / fail judgment as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (S301). Here, the process of acquiring the pending information will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information.

The process of acquiring the hold information determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and if the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b up to the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in each of the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and a maximum of 8 in total). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, the hit / fail judgment result, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is a process to do.

First, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 54 is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensor 54a (S401). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 54 (there was a start prize) (S401: YES), the value of the hold number Na stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NA is read out. It is determined whether or not the acquired number of pending Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings for the first starting port 54 is less than 4, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of holdings is stored up to the upper limit value).

Then, when it is determined that the acquired number of reserved numbers Na is less than 4 (S402: YES), the number of reserved numbers Na of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is added by 1, and the total number of reserved numbers storage area NX. The total number of reservations Nx is read, and the total number of reservations Nx is added by 1 (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired number of pending Na is 4 (S402: NO), the acquisition process of the present pending information is terminated as it is.

After the processing of step 403 is completed, each numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the first start. Information that the winning of the mouth 54 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the total number of holdings Nx added by 1 in step 403 of the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b (S404).

After that, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are made to recognize that the winning of the first start port 54 has occurred, and the confirmation process for the hold notice, which is the process for executing the hold notice (hold notification). (S405) and the hold command setting process (S406) are executed. The confirmation process for the hold notice in step 405 and the setting process for the hold command in step 406 will be specifically described later. After that, the acquisition process of the pending information is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 54 (S401: NO), the winning detection sensor 55a determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 55 (starting winning). Judgment is made based on the detection information of (S407). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 55 (there was a starting prize) (S407: YES), the same processing as in steps 402 to 406 is performed (S408 to S412). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 55 (S407: NO), the acquisition process of the present hold information is terminated as it is.

It should be noted that the processes of steps 408 to 412 differ only in the processes for winning the second starting port 55 with respect to the processes from step 402 to step 406, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In step 408, the value of the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is read and determined, and in step 409, the reserved number Nb of the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is added by 1 and totaled. The total number of holds Nx in the hold number storage area NX is added by 1, and in step 410, the numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3 and the information that a prize is given to the second starting port 55 are obtained. , The special symbol holding ball storage area 114b is stored in the holding area corresponding to the total number of holdings Nx added by 1 in step 403.

The above is the process of acquiring the pending information. Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step 301, the special figure special electric counter information is input from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. The read process is executed (S302). Further, the process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S304).

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game round and the process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (S307), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The figure-changing process (S308) and the special figure-determining process (S309), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (S310), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric open, which is a process for controlling the open state of the large winning opening 56a, are being performed. Controls the process (S311), the special electric closing process (S312), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the large winning opening 56a, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the transition of the game state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (S313), which is a process for performing the operation, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

Explaining the special figure special electric address table with reference to FIG. 21, the special figure special electric counter can set numerical information of "0" to "6", and the special figure special electric address table has the special figure special electric counter. Information on the start address (“SA0” to “SA6”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination processing, the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing, and the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open processing. The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closing processing, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing. ..

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared (initialized) according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to grasp which process should be executed as the special figure special electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, the effect for game times is started when the effects for other game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the game times In the process related to the effect for the game, before starting the effect for the game, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game is being executed is set, and the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the flag is set. In addition, during the execution of the effect for the game round, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is being executed is set, and the flag indicating that the confirmation display is being performed is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not it is.

Further, the open / close execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other open / close execution modes are not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the open / close execution mode is related. In the process, before starting the open / close execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is completed is set, and the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it has been set, and if it is being opened, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that it is being opened is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the large winning opening 56a is being opened is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not.
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

On the other hand, if the special figure special electric counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for confirming the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and the special figure special electric address table, the special figure fluctuation start processing (S307), the special figure fluctuation processing (S308), the special figure finalizing processing (S309), and the special electric power start processing (S310). ), The special electric power opening process (S311), the special electric power closing process (S312), and the special electric power ending process (S313) will be described.

First, after acquiring the start address of step 304, the setting process for the zero flag is executed (S305). In the setting process to the zero flag, the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is read based on the read numerical information. To set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". If it is not "0", "0" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" and the zero flag is "1", the zero flag is changed from "1" to "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the main MPU 112, and is the timer in step 211 in the above timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Subsequently, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process (S308). If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure confirmation processing (S309), and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start processing (S310), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric open processing (S311), if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric closed processing (S312), and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing (S313). Then, when the processes of steps 307 to 313 are executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of steps 307 to 313 will be described individually.

First, the special figure variation start processing in step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start processing. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is stored, and the process for starting the game round in which the variation display is performed on the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Execute.

First, the value of the total number of holds Nx is read from the total number of holds storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired number of holds Nx is 1 or more (S501). Then, when it is determined that the total number of reserved numbers Nx is 0 (S501: NO), the present special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of pending numbers Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), the data setting process is executed (S502).

In the data setting process, first, the total number of reserved numbers Nx is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first reserved area RA1 (that is, the reserved information) is shifted to the execution area RA9. After that, the process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each hold area RA2 to RA8 is executed. That is, this data setting process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first reserved area RA1 and the second. Hold area RA2 → 1st hold area RA1, 3rd hold area RA3 → 2nd hold area RA2, 4th hold area RA4 → 3rd hold area RA3, 5th hold area RA5 → 4th hold area RA4, 6th hold The data in each area is shifted such as area RA6 → 5th reserved area RA5, 7th reserved area RA7 → 6th reserved area RA6, 8th reserved area RA8 → 7th reserved area RA7. Further, in this data setting process, a shift command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data in the hold areas RA1 to RA8 has been shifted is set as an output target.

Subsequently, the hit / fail determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S503). In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. judge. Then, when it is determined that the mode is in the high probability mode, the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15B) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Of the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the high probability mode. Determine if they match. If it is determined that the mode is in the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Of the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the low probability mode. Determine if they match. The high-probability mode flag is stored after the ending time in the open / close execution mode has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1202), and is deleted when the high-probability game count counter becomes 0 (FIG. 24, S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is the winning result (S504). If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S504: YES), the distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S505). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the winning type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the winning type counter storage area 202) and the winning prize. The information of the starting port (information stored in the winning starting port storage area 204) is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 grasped above (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to.
Specifically, in the case where a prize is won in the first starting port 54, the 16R probability variation hit result is obtained by referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 16A). It is specified which of the 4R probability variation hit result, the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and the 4RRU probability variation hit result corresponds to. Further, in the case where a prize is won in the second starting port 55, the 16R probability variation hit result and the 4R probability variation hit are referred to with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 16B) for the second result display unit. As a result, it is specified which of the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and the 4RRU probability variation hit result corresponds to.

After that, the stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (S506). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. It is specified from the stop result table for the hit result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for the hit result, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each type of the hit result.

Next, the flag storage process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hit result specified in step 505 of the various hit result flag storage areas 114j of the main RAM 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S504: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113 for the deviation result. The stop result table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the winning result.

After executing any of the processes of step 507 and step 508, the process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) is executed (S509). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the winning results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, although it is not a hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RA9 (numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence. In that case, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS this time is supported. Acquire the variable display time information. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time table for non-reach generation, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113, is referred to, and the variation type counter CS of this time is used. Acquires variable display time information corresponding to numerical information.

The variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach occurrence. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the total number of pending numbers Nx increases. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the total number of holdings Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various hit results, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of out-reach and the case of out-of-reach non-occurrence (complete off). In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

Next, the information on the fluctuation display time acquired in step 509 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process (S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Further, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 80 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the game round is performed. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line), the confirmation display (final stop display) is performed over the confirmation time (final stop time).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is the total time for one game minus the fixed time. In this respect, the variable display time can be rephrased as the time before the confirmation (the time before the final stop).

Subsequently, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table is the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach generation variation display time table. Therefore, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, identifies the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the fluctuation display time information. It is possible to do. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and the 4RRU probability variation hit result as the game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Will be done.

Next, as in step 504, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f (S512), and when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is stored, it is determined. (S512: YES), the high-probability game count counter of the high-probability game count counter area 114 g provided in the main RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (S513). The high-probability game count counter is set to a specified number of times (100 in this embodiment) after the ending time in the open / close execution mode has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1202).

After subtracting 1 from the high-probability game count counter, or when it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is not stored (S512: NO), the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 is started (S514). Figure Add 1 to the special electric counter (S515). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step 515 is executed. ".
After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step 308 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure. The special figure change processing is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the variation display time in the production for this game round has elapsed ( S601). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" and the zero flag is set to "1" is the fluctuation display time in the production for this game round. It means that it has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S601: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so that the update timing of the main display unit 71 (update of the light emission pattern) It is determined whether or not it is (timing) (S602). Then, when it is determined that it is not the update timing (S602: NO), the processing during the change of the special figure is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update timing is reached (S602: YES), the update content reading process is executed (S603). For this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113i of the main ROM 113.

Next, an update process is executed in which the update content read in step 603 is set for the update of the main display unit 71 (S604). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed by the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S601: YES), the fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as the output target (S605). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the effect for the current game round.

Then, the process of reading the stop result is executed (S606). In the reading process, at the start of the game round this time, information on the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed, which is set in the main RAM 114 in step 506 or step 508 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 22), is read. After that, an update process is executed in which the information on the mode of the read pattern is set for updating the main display unit 71 (S607).

Subsequently, the information of the fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the fixed time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S608). Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S609). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure changing processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the processing of step 609 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

Next, the process during special figure determination in step 309 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the production for this game round has elapsed (S701). ). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the fixed time has passed in the production for this game. It means that you did. If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S701: NO), the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the fixed time has passed (S701: YES), the winning / failing determination that triggered the game round this time is determined by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114j in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result of is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode) (S702). In the various hit result flag storage areas 114j, the flags corresponding to the hit results are stored in the flag storage process of step 507 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 22).

When it is determined that the result is a hit (S702: YES), the opening command is set as the output target (S703). The opening command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability variation hit result, 4R probability variation hit result, 16RRU probability variation hit result, 8RRU probability variation hit result, 4RRU probability variation hit result) that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the opening time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S704). Then, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S705). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the process of step 705 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a hit result (S702: NO), that is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the game round this time is a wrong result (that is, a result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode). Is determined whether or not the value of the high-probability game count counter is 1 or more (S706). Then, when it is determined that the high-probability game count counter is 0 (S706: NO), the high-probability mode flag is deleted if the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f (S707). ). After clearing the high-probability mode flag, or when it is determined that the value of the high-probability game count counter is 1 or more (S706: YES), the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S708). .. After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

Next, the special electric start processing of step 310 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special electric power start processing. The special electric power start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "3".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (S801). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode has passed. Means. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S801: NO), the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S801: YES), the round counters provided in the other counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114 are set to set the number of rounds corresponding to the various hit results. Process (S802). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the main MPU 112, and one round is consumed in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode. "1" is subtracted each time.

Here, the setting process for the round of step 802 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the round.

First, "10" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counters provided in the other various counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114 (S901). The winning counter is a counter in which "1" is subtracted each time a game ball is won in the large winning opening 56a.

Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114j in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electric start processing is the 16R probability variation hit result. (S902). Then, when it is determined that it is not the 16R probability variation hit result (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the 16RRU probability variation hit result (S903), and when it is determined that it is not the 16RRU probability variation hit result (S903: NO). ), It is determined whether or not it is an 8RRU probability variation hit result (S904), and when it is determined that it is not an 8RRU probability variation hit result (S904: NO), it is determined whether or not it is a 4RRU probability variation hit result (S905). ..

When it is determined that it is a 16R probability variation hit result (S902: YES), when it is determined that it is a 16RRU probability variation hit result (S903: YES), when it is determined that it is an 8RRU probability variation hit result (S904: YES), 4RRU probability variation If it is determined that the result is a hit (S905: YES), after setting "16" in the round counter (S906), the setting process for this round ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not a 4RRU probability variation hit result (S905: NO), that is, when it is determined that the result is a 4R probability variation hit result, after setting "4" in the round counter (S907), the setting for this round End the process.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric start processing, after completing the setting processing for the round of step 802, the information on the first duration for opening the large winning opening 56a according to the winning result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time. Is read (S803). In this embodiment, the initial opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S804).

Next, the opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 56a is executed (S805).
In this open setting process, "1" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started in order to switch the large winning port 56a to the open state.

Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S806). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 806 is executed. Become. After that, the special electric train start process is completed.

Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step 311 in the special power special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special electric power. The processing during opening of the special electric power is the processing after the special electric power start processing, and the numerical information of the special electric power counter is "4".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening duration in the current round game has elapsed (S1001). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

When it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1001: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1002). Subsequently, the closing time information (for example, 1 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the closing time setting process is performed in which the closing time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1003). Then, a closing setting process for closing the large winning opening 56a is executed (S1004). In the closing setting process, "0" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is stopped in order to switch the large winning port 56a to the closed state.

Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1005). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing during opening of the special electric power is executed is "4", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing of step 1005 is executed is "5". Become. After that, the processing during the opening of this special electric train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening duration has not elapsed (S1001: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the large winning opening 56a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 56c (S1006). ), If it is determined that there is no winning in the large winning opening 56a (S1006: NO), the processing during the opening of this special electric train is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize in the large prize opening 56a (S1006: YES), the prize counter is subtracted by 1 (S1007). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is "0" (S1008), and if it is determined to be "0" (S1008: YES), after executing the processes of steps 1002 to 1005, the present Ends processing while the special electric power is open. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (S1008: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric power is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing during closing of the special electric power in step 312 in the special drawing special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during closing of the special electric train. The special electric power closing process is a process after the special electric power opening process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "5".

First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0" (S1101). If the round counter is not "0" (S1101: NO), whether the closing time has elapsed by checking whether "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. It is determined whether or not (S1102). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the closing time has passed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1102: NO), the processing during closing of the special electric train is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1102: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter (S1103). Subsequently, the read processing of the open duration is executed (S1104). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114j, the result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out and based on these. The information on the duration for opening the large winning opening 56a is read out. In the pachinko machine 10, the opening duration corresponds to the short-time mode from the 5th R (round counter = 12) in the 4RRU probability variation hit result, and from the 9Rth (round counter = 8) to the short-time mode in the 8RRU probability variation hit result. The duration is set so that it is the corresponding open duration. Further, in the 16R probability variation hit result and the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the opening duration is set to correspond to the long-time mode in all rounds. Then, the read open duration information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1105).

Subsequently, the open setting process is executed (S1106). The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process of step 805 in the special electric power start process (FIG. 25). Next, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (S1107). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 1107 is executed. It becomes. After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is "0" (S1101: YES), the ending command is set as the output target (S1108). The ending command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1109). Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1110). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special figure closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" when the process of step 2010 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

Next, the special electric power termination process of step 313 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special electric power termination process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "6".

First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1201). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where "1" is set in the zero flag in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1201: NO), the special train termination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1201: YES), the game state transition process is executed (S1202). In the game state transition process, the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114, and "100" is set in the high-probability game count counter in the high-probability game count counter area 114g of the main RAM 114. To do. In this embodiment, all the hit results are probabilistic hit results, and after the ending, all shift to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of this step 1202, the flags indicating the information corresponding to the types of hit results are deleted from the various hit result flag storage areas 114j. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1203). After that, the special train termination process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control process is executed by using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games composed of the effect for game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, the special figure special electric counter may be referred to. It is not necessary to check multiple flags at each processing timing as in. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, in each of the processes of steps 307 to 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for ending a certain situation and performing a transition to the next situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, "0", which is the initial value of the special figure special electric counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of game situations including the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to set the first situation in the above series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter after the initialization of the main RAM 114 or the like.

Further, when updating the special figure special electric counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

Further, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above series of game situations is set separately from each process of steps 307 to 313, and refer to the special figure special electric counter. It is not included in each process executed. As a result, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information can be simplified.

Further, among the processes of steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period is measured by using a common period measuring means called a special figure special electric timer counter. The measurement is done. As a result, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situations corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter do not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is referred to at the same time in a plurality of situations. There is no such thing, and the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

Further, the process of updating the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (FIG. 18, S211) set as a process different from steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electric timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps 307 to 313.

Further, the confirmation of whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" is collectively performed in step 305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), and in each process of step 308 to step 313, it is performed. The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112.
As a result, as compared with the case where the numerical information is read from the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is "0" in each process of steps 308 to 313. The processing configuration can be simplified.

Here, the special figure special figure counter is referred to in order to confirm which situation is in a series of games including the effect for game rotation and the open / close execution mode even in the process other than the special figure special figure control process. To. For example, the special electric special figure counter is also referred to in the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the demo display process will be described later.

Next, the confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54, which is executed in step 405 of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20), will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54.

First, the total number of reservations Nx stored in the total number of reservations storage area NX of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b is read, and the total number of reservations Nx is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). Then, among the hold information acquired in step 404 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20) based on the current winning of the first start port 54, the information for hit determination, that is, the hit random number counter C1 is updated. Grasp the information (S1302).

Next, it is determined (estimated) whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode at the time when the game round related to the hold is started is the low probability mode (S1303). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the number of high-probability games is 100, first, the total number of reserved games Nx stored in the register in step 1301 is compared with the value of the high-probability game counter. If the value of the high-probability game count counter is larger (if the game round triggered by the hold is in the high-probability mode), it is determined that the high-probability mode is used. If the value of the high-probability game count counter is smaller, the flag storage area 205 per advance notification (see FIG. 14) is set in the hold area whose number is equal to or lower than the hold area corresponding to the total hold number Nx read in step 1301. ), It is determined whether or not the advance notification hit flag is stored, and if the advance notification hit flag is stored, it is determined that the mode is high probability.

When it is determined that the mode is in the low probability mode (S1303: YES), the information for hit determination grasped in step 1302 is obtained by referring to the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 15 (a). It is determined (estimated) whether or not it is included in the information set as a winning (S1304). On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1303: NO), that is, in the case of the high probability mode, the step 1302 is performed with reference to the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. It is determined (estimated) whether or not the information for winning determination grasped in the above is included in the information set as winning (S1305).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information for winning determination grasped in step 1302 corresponds to winning (S1306). When it is determined that the winning is supported (S1306: YES), the advance notification hit flag is stored in the advance notification hit flag storage area 205 of the hold area in which each numerical value is stored in step 404 (S1307). Then, the information for determining the type of the reserved information acquired in step 404 based on the winning of the first starting port 54, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the hit type counter C2 is grasped (S1308). ..

Next, referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit shown in FIG. 16A (S1309), the information for hit type determination grasped in step 1308 is set as the 16R probability variation hit result. Identify which of the information set as the 4R probability variation hit result, the information set as the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the information set as the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and the information set as the 4RRU probability variation hit result ( (Estimation), and various hit result information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1310).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit determination information grasped in step 1302 does not correspond to the winning (S1306: NO), the out-of-reach determination information among the pending information acquired in step 404, That is, the information acquired from the information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped (S1311).

Then, referring to the reach determination table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113 (S1312), the reach determination information grasped in step 1311 is included in the information set as the reach generation. It is determined (estimated) whether or not it is satisfied (S1313). If it is determined that the reach generation is supported (S1313: YES), the reach generation information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1314), and then the confirmation process for this hold notice is terminated. If it is determined that the reach generation is not supported (S1313: NO), the confirmation process for this notice is terminated as it is.

Next, a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 55, which is executed in step 411 of the holding information acquisition process (FIG. 20), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 54.

As shown in FIG. 31, the confirmation process (S1401 to S1414) for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55 is triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 described with reference to FIG. It is basically the same as the confirmation process for the hold notice. The difference from the confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 is that when it is determined that the grasped information for winning determination corresponds to winning (S1406: YES). With reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit shown in FIG. 16 (b) (S1409), it is specified which hit information includes the hit type determination information grasped in step 1408 (S1409). Only the process (S1410) to be estimated) is performed. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the setting process of the hold command triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 executed in step 406 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the hold command.

First, it is determined whether or not any of 16R probability variation hit result information, 4R probability variation hit result information, 16RRU probability variation hit result information, 8RRU probability variation hit result information, and 4RRU probability variation hit result information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112. (S1501). When it is determined that any of the hit information is stored (S1501: YES), the hit correspondence hold command corresponding to each hit result is set as the output target (S1502).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the various hit result information is not stored (S1501: NO), it is determined whether or not the reach generation information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1503). When it is determined that the reach generation information is stored (S1503: YES), the off-reach correspondence hold command is set as the output target (S1504). If it is determined that the reach generation information is not stored (S1503: NO), other corresponding hold commands are set as output targets (S1505). Then, after executing any of the processes of step 1502, step 1504, and step 1505, the setting process of this hold command is terminated.

In addition, the setting process of the hold command triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55 executed in step 412 of the holding information acquisition process (FIG. 20) is the holding triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54. Since it is the same as the command setting process, a specific description will be omitted.

Next, the general-purpose electric control processing executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the Fuzu Fuden control process.

In the normal symbol control process, when a prize is generated in the normal symbol start gate 57, a process for acquiring the hold information of the normal symbol is executed, and the hold information of the normal symbol is stored. In addition, the release determination of the electric accessory 63 is performed for the hold information, and further, the release determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for a normal symbol. Further, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 63 is executed based on the result of the opening determination.

Specifically, first, the process of acquiring the hold information of the ordinary symbol is executed (S1701). In the acquisition process, the numerical information of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (that is, the hold information of the normal symbol) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 57. Execute the process to be performed. It should be noted that the acquisition of the hold information of the ordinary symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of hold (4 in this embodiment).

Next, the process of reading the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden counter area 114h of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1702), and the Fuzu Fuden address table storage area 113h of the main ROM 113 executes the Fuzu Fuden. The process of reading the information in the address table is executed (S1703). Then, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden address table is executed (S1704).

Explaining the processing contents of steps 1702 to 1704, as described above, the fuzu-fuden control process includes a process related to the production for the fuzu and a process related to opening and closing of the electric accessory 63. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process, the normal map change process, and the normal map finalization process are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 63, a processing during the opening of the electric power and a processing during the closing of the electric power are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is stored in the Fuzu Fuden address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Explaining the Fuzu Fuden address table with reference to FIG. 34, the Fuzu Tokuden counter can set numerical information from "0" to "4", and the Fuzu Fuden address table can be set to Fuzu Fuden. The start address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal figure, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program to execute the process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special electric control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process should be executed as the normal figure normal electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, the Fuden opening processing, and the Fuden closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be described.

After executing the process of step 1704, the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol is executed (S1705). In the setting process of the zero flag of the normal symbol, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read, and when the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is "0", the main MPU 112 The process of setting "1" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of is executed. In other words, if the numerical information of the normal symbol timer counter is not "0", the process of setting "0" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (erasing "1") is performed. Execute. The normal figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the normal figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the main MPU 112, and is the timer update process (FIG. 18) of the above timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Numerical information is subtracted in S211).

Next, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1704 is executed (S1706). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process (S1707), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation process (S1708). If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the normal drawing confirmation processing (S1709), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the normal electric opening processing (S1710) and the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, the process (S1711) during closing of the normal train is jumped.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S1707), on the condition that the hold information of the normal symbol is stored, the release determination of the electric accessory 63 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and the main display unit 71 In the other display unit 71d of the above, the process of starting the variable display (blinking display) of the pattern is executed. In this case, when the information of the variable display time for fluctuating the pattern to be displayed on the other display unit 71d is set in the Fuzuden timer counter and the fluctuating display of the pattern on the other display unit 71d is started. The electric counter is updated from "0" to "1".

In the normal map fluctuation processing (S1708), other processes for updating the display on the display unit 71d are executed. In this case, on condition that the passage of the variable display time is confirmed, the information of the fixed time is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

In the normal figure confirmation processing (S1709), a process for displaying the result of the opening determination this time on the other display unit 71d for the confirmation time of the normal symbol is executed, and the result of the opening determination is the winning result. The process for opening the electric accessory 63 and the process for setting the number of times of opening the electric accessory 63 when the electric accessory 63 is opened are executed with the winning result of this time as an opportunity. In this case, on the condition that the passage of the fixed time of the normal symbol has been confirmed and the result of the opening judgment is the winning result, the information of the opening duration of this time in the electric accessory 63 is input to the Fuzu Fuden timer counter. At the same time, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the normal power counter is updated from "2" to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the opening judgment is not the winning result even though the lapse of the confirmation time of the normal symbol is confirmed, the electric accessory 63 is not set to be in the open state, and the normal figure general electric counter is set to ". 0 ”The processing to clear is executed.

In the processing during the opening of the normal electric power (S1710), the processing for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 63 and closing the electric accessory 63 when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 63 is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 is set in the normal electric timer counter, and the electric accessory 63 is closed. The state is set, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

In the process during closing of the electric utility (S1711), when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 63 and to open the electric accessory 63 again, the process for opening the electric accessory 63. To execute. In this case, on condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 63, the information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 63 is provided. It is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "4" to "3". On the other hand, if it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 63 again even though the lapse of the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has been confirmed, the electric accessory 63 is not set to be in the open state and is usually used. Figure The process of clearing the normal power counter to "0" is executed.

When any of the processes of steps 1707 to 1711 is executed, the present power control process is terminated.

As described above, by using the Fuzu Fuden counter, the Fuzu Fuden address table, and the Fuzu Fuden timer counter to execute the Fuzu Fuden control process, the production and electric role for the Fuzu When the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games consisting of the opening and closing of the object 63, it is sufficient to refer to the Fuzu Fuden counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, when updating the Fuzu Fuden counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. Further, since the zero flag of the normal symbol is used as in the case of the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control processing, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Next, the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a demo display process.

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1801). When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence or absence of the flag that the effect for game rounds is being executed as in the conventional case, and the presence or absence of the flag is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, first It is necessary to read the information of the flag of 1 from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information, and then read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information. Then, it is necessary to specify the address to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to set the data in the register at least twice when the data is transferred to the address. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electric counter, the address can be specified once to the main RAM 114, and the data setting process to the register when the data is transferred to it can be done only once. .. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

If it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is not "0" (S1801: NO), the process for displaying this demo is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1801). : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the demo display state (S1802).

The demo display state means that the symbol display device 80 has already performed the demo display (that is, the standby display), and the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114m of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo display waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous open / close execution mode is completed. , 0.1 sec), the image of the start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 perform the effect accordingly. To say.

In the demo display on the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbol is a predetermined one. After or instead of displaying the operating image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed.

If it is determined that the demo display state is present (S1802: YES), the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present (S1802: NO), the demo display wait state is set. Whether or not it is determined (S1803). The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo display waiting time has already started, and the demo display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114m of the main RAM 114. is there.

When it is determined that the demo display waiting state is not set (S1803: N0), the demo display waiting time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the demo display waiting time information is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1804). Subsequently, the demo display waiting state is set by storing the demo display waiting flag in the other various flag storage areas 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1805). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the demo display is waiting state (S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1806). If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" (S1806: NO), the demo display process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1806: YES), the demo display state is set by storing the demo display flag in the other various flag storage areas 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1807). ). In the process of step 1807, the demo display waiting flag is cleared to release the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is canceled by clearing the demo display flag when the effect for the game round is newly started. Next, the demo start command is set as the output target (S1808). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, execution control of effect and notification using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in, for example, 4 msec.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the main command storage process is executed (S1901). The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the voice RAM 154 when a command is received from the main MPU 112. This command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Next, the main command correspondence process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 112 is executed (S1902). The main command correspondence process will be described in detail later. Subsequently, the second frame button correspondence process is executed (S1903). In this second frame button correspondence process, when the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on the condition that the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times or open / close execution mode). , Set the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation for updating. Whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the detection sensor that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

After that, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed (S1904), and a voice control process for performing voice control of the speaker unit 34 is executed (S1905). The light emission control process and the voice control process are executed based on the information set for update in step 1903. Subsequently, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S1906).

Next, it is determined whether or not the operation of the first frame button 26 is in the valid operation period (S1907). In the present embodiment, in a situation where one unit of effect such as a game turn effect is executed by a predetermined start trigger, an operation valid period in which the operation of the first frame button 26 is valid may occur. In this case, if the first frame button 26 is operated during the operation valid period, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 may be replaced. On the other hand, when the first frame button 26 is operated outside the operation valid period, the reserved symbols are not replaced, but the background stage (underwater mode, sandy beach mode, city mode) displayed on the symbol display device 80 is displayed. It may be changed and displayed, a chance-up effect of a reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 80, or an effect of a notice character may be displayed. Therefore, in this step 1907, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. Specifically, as will be described later, the voice side MPU 152 executes the operation valid lottery process (S2007) in the main side command correspondence process (S1902), and when the operation valid lottery is won, the operation valid flag of the voice side RAM 154 The operation valid flag is stored in the storage area 154c (FIG. 42, S2407). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period is in effect by determining whether or not the operation valid flag is stored.

If it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (S1907: YES), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1908). Whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by a signal from a detection sensor that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26.

When it is determined that the first frame button 26 is not operated (S1908: NO), it is determined whether or not the operation valid timer counter is 0 (S1909). Specifically, as will be described later, when the operation valid lottery of the main command correspondence process (S1902) is won, the operation valid flag is stored and the information of the predetermined time is set in the operation valid timer counter (). 42, S2408). Therefore, by reading the numerical information of the operation valid timer counter, it is determined whether or not the operation valid timer counter is 0, and if it is determined that the operation valid timer counter is not 0 (S1909: NO), it is as it is. This timer interrupt processing ends. Further, when the first frame button 26 is operated (S1908: YES), the replacement process is executed immediately after (S1910). The replacement process will be described in detail later, but when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won, the reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 are replaced, so that the player can replace the reserved symbols based on his / her own operation. I can recognize that it was done. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the first frame button is not operated, if it is determined that the operation valid timer counter is 0 (S1909: YES), after executing the replacement process (S1910), the present embodiment Terminates timer interrupt processing. As a result, as in the case where the first frame button is operated, when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won, the reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 are exchanged, so that the effect can be matched. it can.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (S1907: NO), the timer interrupt process is terminated after the first frame button corresponding process is executed (S1911). In this first frame button correspondence process, if the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times or open / close execution mode), or if one unit of game times is processed, the game is concerned. A first frame button operation command indicating that the first frame button 26 has been operated is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 on condition that the variable display of the times is stopped before a predetermined period.

Next, the main command correspondence process in the timer interrupt process of the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main command correspondence process.

First, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command are received from the main MPU 112 (S2001), and if it is determined that these commands are received (S2001: YES), the game result is stored. Is executed (S2002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game, that is, this game. Information on which hit result is the result of the game is specified, and the process of writing the specified information to the retained data area 154f provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154f is data that is temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the notification, and after these effects and notifications are started. Is also an area for storing and holding data to be independently used by the voice MPU 152.

Next, the advance notice lottery process is executed (S2003). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 80 in this game round. As this notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 80 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is used as the previous mode. Also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the winning results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

Next, the stop symbol determination process is executed (S2004). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is a 16R probability variation hit result and a 4R probability variation hit result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. It will be decided as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd-numbered symbols are likely to be selected as symbols forming a combination of the same symbols. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is a 16RRU probability variation hit result, an 8RRU probability variation hit result, or a 4RRU probability variation hit result, the number "3" is displayed in the upper symbol sequence Z1 on the effective line L2. This time, the attached main symbol, the main symbol with the number "1" in the lower symbol row Z3, and the information corresponding to the stop result which is the character symbol of the whale shown in FIG. 8 (j) in the middle symbol row Z2 are provided this time. It is decided as the information of the stop result of.

Subsequently, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed (S2005). In this process, the information of the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information of the variation display time, the information of the game result specified in the above step 2002, And the effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in the above step 2003 is selected.

Next, a process of writing the type of the stop symbol determined in step 2004 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 2005 to the holding data area 154f of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2006). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the game times this time, by writing the information on the effect pattern in the holding data area 154f, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time can be obtained. However, the voice side MPU 152 can be read again.

Next, the operation valid lottery process is performed (S2007). This operation-effective lottery process will be described in detail later, but whether or not to generate an operation notification for the player to operate the first frame button 26 based on the information of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154. The lottery will be held.

Subsequently, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 2004 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 2005 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162.
Further, when the operation valid lottery process in step 2007 is won, the operation notification command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2008). The processing content of the display-side MPU 162 due to the reception of these commands will be described later, but when the display-side MPU 162 receives the operation notification command, "when the button is pressed, the reserved symbol is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80.""Maybe they will be replaced !?" is displayed to notify the player that the operation of the first frame button 26 is valid (see FIG. 47). Then, the period during which this display is performed is during the operation valid period of step 1907 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 36) of the voice side MPU 152.

In the symbol display device 80, the operation notification time for displaying "If the button is pressed, the reserved symbols may be replaced !?" is fixed, and in the present embodiment, it is set to 3 sec, which is shorter than all the variable display periods. ing. However, the operation notification time of the symbol display device 80, "If you press the button, the reserved symbols may be replaced !?" is not limited to this, and even if the total number of reserved symbols Nx and the game state are changed. Good. For example, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time when reach is not generated is set to be shorter as the total number of holdings Nx is larger, as described above, and is less frequent in the high frequency support mode. It is set shorter than the situation in support mode. Therefore, the operation notification time may be set to be shorter as the total number of holdings Nx increases, and in the situation of the high frequency support mode, it may be shorter than that of the situation of the low frequency support mode.

Next, the game count update process is executed (S2009). In this update process, a process for updating the game count counter is executed so that the number of digested games measured by the game count counter provided in the other various counter areas 154h of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of digested games is the number of games that have been digested after the end of the open / close execution mode without shifting to the open / close execution mode again. In the voice side MPU 152, the information on the number of digested games can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of digested games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is easy to select a predetermined notice display in the notice lottery process. Execute the processing that becomes.

It is determined whether or not the fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received when it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S2001: NO) or after the game count update process has been executed. (S2010). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation stop command has been received (S2010: YES), the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2011). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S2010: NO), or after the process of transmitting the symbol stop command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received (S2012), and the hold command has been executed. When it is determined that the above is received (S2012: YES), the hold command correspondence process is executed (S2013).

Here, the hold command correspondence process in step 2013 of the main command correspondence process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process.

First, before explaining the hold command correspondence process, the configuration of the sub-special symbol hold ball storage area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b.

The slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b follows the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114, and includes the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8. Then, the slave 1st to slave 8 holding areas RC1 to RC8 are the hit notification winning flag storage area 211, the hit notification non-winning flag storage area 212, the loss notification winning flag storage area 213, and the loss notification non-winning flag storage area 214. It has a replaced flag storage area 215. The winning notification winning flag storage area 211 is an area in which the winning notification winning flag is stored when the received hold command includes the hit result information and the hold notification lottery described later is won. The winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212 is an area in which the winning notification result information is included in the received hold command and the winning notification non-winning flag is stored when the hold notification lottery, which will be described later, is not won. The loss notification winning flag storage area 213 is an area in which the loss result information is included in the received hold command, and the loss notification winning flag is stored when the hold notification lottery described later is won. The loss notification non-winning flag storage area 214 is an area in which the loss notification result information is included in the received hold command, and the loss notification non-winning flag is stored when the hold notification lottery, which will be described later, is not won. The replacement flag storage area 215 is an area in which the replacement flag is stored when the replacement lottery, which will be described later, is won.

In the following, the slave hold area is also referred to as the slave hold area RC #, and # indicates the corresponding character among the numbers 1 to 8. That is, when the subordinate holding area RC # is indicated, it means that the corresponding one of the subordinate 1st to 8th reserved areas RC1 to RC8 is indicated.

Further, the slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b is provided with a slave total hold number storage area INX for storing the total number of holds stored in the slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8. .. The above is the configuration of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b in the present embodiment.

In the hold command correspondence process, first, the total hold number INx of the total hold number storage area INX of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b is added by 1 (S2201). Next, is the hold command received this time a hit response hold command indicating that it corresponds to any of the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and the 4RRU probability variation hit result? It is determined whether or not (S2202).

When it is determined that the command is a hit response hold command (S2202: YES), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hold notification symbol (“●”) in the hold symbol display area Ds * of the symbol display device 80. The first hold notification lottery process is executed (S2203). In the first hold notification lottery process, first, the value of the hold notification lottery counter is read from the hold notification lottery counter area 154e provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the hold notification lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and has reached the maximum value. It is configured to be initialized to 0 later. Then, in the first hold notification lottery process, the value of the read hold notification lottery counter is notified by referring to the hit hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the audio side ROM 153. Judge whether or not it corresponds to winning.
The probability of winning the hold notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/10.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the first hold notification lottery process is the notification winning (S2204). When it is determined that the hold notification is won (S2204: YES), the notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2205). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold notification is not won (S2204: NO), the winning notification non-winning information is stored (S2206).

Further, when it is determined that it is not a winning hold command (S2202: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is a missed reach corresponding hold command or another corresponding hold command, a pseudo hold notification lottery process (S2207) is performed.

Here, the pseudo hold notification lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a pseudo hold notification lottery process. In the pseudo hold notification lottery process, basically the same process as in steps 2202 to 2206 is performed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the hold command is a hold command for reaching out (S2301). Then, when it is determined that the hold command is a hold command corresponding to loss (S2301: YES), the second hold notification lottery process is executed (S2302), and when it is determined that the hold command is not a hold command corresponding to loss reach (S2301). : NO), that is, when it is determined that the hold command is another corresponding hold command (when it is determined that the hold command is completely out of reach), the third hold notification lottery process is executed (S2303).
In the second and third hold notification lottery processes, first, the value of the hold notification lottery counter is read from the hold notification lottery counter area 154e provided in the voice side RAM 154. In this embodiment, in step 2302 and step 2303, the value is read from the same counter. Then, in the second hold notification lottery process, the value of the hold notification lottery counter read out is set by referring to the out-of-reach hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the audio side ROM 153. Judge whether or not it corresponds to the notification winning. The probability of winning the notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the reach hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/5. On the other hand, in the third hold notification lottery process, the value of the hold notification lottery counter read out is set by referring to the completely off hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the audio side ROM 153. Judge whether or not it corresponds to the notification winning. The probability of winning the notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, a completely off hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/100. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the reach response hold has a higher probability of winning the notification than the complete disconnection response hold (complete disconnection hold that does not result in reach).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the second and third hold notification lottery processes is the hold notification winning (S2304). If it is determined that the hold notification is won (S2304: YES), the loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2305), and the pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold notification is not won (S2304: NO), the information on the non-winning notification is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2306), and the pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the information stored in step 2205, step 2206, step 2305, and step 2306 includes the winning notification winning information or the losing notification winning information (S2208). If it is determined that there is winning notification winning information or losing notification winning information (S2208: YES), a hold notification command (hold special notification command) is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2209). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning notification winning information or losing notification winning information (S2208: NO), a hold non-notification command (hold normal notification command) is transmitted (S2210). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of these hold notification commands and the hold non-notification commands will be described in detail later. However, when the display side MPU 162 receives the hold notification command, the hold symbol display area of the symbol display device 80 The hold notification symbol "●" is displayed on Ds *. Further, when the display side MPU 162 receives the hold non-notification command, the hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * of the symbol display device 80.

Subsequently, the slave holding area RC # corresponding to the total number of holdings INx added by 1 in step 2201 in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b corresponds to the information stored in step 2205, step 2206, step 2305, and step 2306. Various flags are stored (S2211), and then the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated. In the process of step 2211, specifically, when the process of step 2205 is executed, the hit notification winning flag is stored in the hit notification winning flag storage area 211, and when the process of step 2206 is executed, it is a hit. When the notification non-winning flag is stored in the notification non-winning flag storage area 212 and the process of step 2305 is executed, the loss notification winning flag storage area 213 is stored and the processing of step 2306 is executed. In this case, the loss notification non-winning flag is stored in the loss notification non-winning flag storage area 214.

Next, the operation valid lottery process of step 2007 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an operation effective lottery process.

First, the value of the total number of reservations INx stored in the total number of reservations storage area INX of the slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b in the voice side RAM 154 is read, and it is determined whether or not the acquired total number of reservations INx is 2 or more. (S2401). When it is determined that the total number of reserved balls INx is 2 or more (S2401: YES), the notification winning flag and the notification non-winning are applied to the slave 1st to slave 8 holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether or not the flag is stored (S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one of the winning notification winning flag or the losing notification winning flag and at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag or the losing notification non-winning flag are stored. That is, it is determined whether or not at least one hold notification symbol "●" and one hold non-notification symbol "○" are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. Then, when it is determined that the notification winning flag and the notification non-winning flag are stored (S2402: YES), the replacement flag is not stored in the slave holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored. It is determined whether or not there is (S2403). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a hold notification symbol that has not been replaced. The replaced flag is a flag stored in the replaced flag storage area 215 when the replacement lottery described later is won. That is, in the replacement process, the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, but the hold notification symbol is replaced as the hold notification symbol in the 1st to 8th hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. When only is displayed, the operation notification is not performed.

When it is determined that there is an item in which the replaced flag is not stored in the slave holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored (S2403: YES), the operation notification lottery process is executed (S2404).

In this operation notification lottery process, first, the value of the operation notification lottery counter is read from the operation notification lottery counter area 154d of the voice side RAM 154. Here, the operation lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and after reaching the maximum value. It is configured to be initialized to 0. Then, in the operation notification lottery process, the value of the operation notification lottery counter read out corresponds to the operation winning by referring to the operation notification lottery table stored in the operation notification lottery table storage area 153a of the voice side ROM 153. Determine if it is. The probability of winning the operation is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the operation notification lottery table is set so that the operation notification is won with a probability of 1/5.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the operation notification lottery process is the notification winning (S2405). When it is determined that the notification is won (S2405: YES), the process of writing the information of the operation notification winning to the holding data area 154f of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2406). After that, the voice side MPU 152 stores the operation valid flag in the operation valid flag storage area 154c (S2407), and sets the operation notification time in the operation valid timer counter of various other counter areas 154h provided in the voice side MPU 152. (S2408), the operation valid lottery process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of pending numbers INx is not 2 or more (S2401: NO), it is determined that there is no substitute holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored and the replaced flag is not stored (S2401: NO). If it is determined that S2403: NO) or the notification is not won (S2405: NO), the operation valid lottery process is terminated as it is.

Then, the voice side MPU 152 acquires the value of the operation valid timer counter set in step 2408 in the process of step 1909 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), and determines whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. The numerical value of the operation valid timer counter is updated (subtracted) by the timer update process in step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

Returning to the description of the main command correspondence process in FIG. 37, whether or not the shift command is received when it is determined that the hold command is not received (S2012: NO) or after the hold command correspondence process is executed. Is determined (S2014). If it is determined that the shift command has been received (S2014: YES), the shift command correspondence process is performed (S2015). The shift command is a command that is set as an output target when the data in the hold area in the main RAM 114 is shifted as described in step 502 above. The process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-eighth reserved areas RC1 to RC8 to the lower area side is executed. Specifically, while clearing the data of the slave 1st hold area RC1, the slave 2 hold area RC2 → the slave 1 hold area RC1, the slave 3 hold area RC3 → the slave 2 hold area RC2, the slave 4 hold Area RC4 → Subordinate 3rd Hold Area RC3, Subordinate 5th Hold Area RC5 → Subordinate 4th Hold Area RC4, Subordinate 6th Hold Area RC6 → Subordinate 5th Hold Area RC5, Subordinate 7th Hold Area RC7 → Subordinate 6th Hold Area The data in each area is shifted such as RC6, the slave 8th hold area RC8 → the slave 7th hold area RC7. Further, in the shift command correspondence process, a process of subtracting 1 from the total hold number INx of the slave total hold number storage area INX and a process of transmitting a shift command to the display side MPU 162 are executed.

When it is determined that the shift command has not been received (S2014: NO), or after the shift command correspondence process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received, as shown in FIG. 38. (S2101). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2101: YES), the update process for the number of hits is executed (S2102). In the update process, a process for updating the hit count counter is executed so that the hit count measured by the hit count counter provided in the other various counter areas 154h of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called continuous hits) that occur after shifting to the high-probability mode without shifting to the low-probability mode. In the audio side MPU 152, the information on the number of hits can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is a predetermined number or more, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image in the open / close execution mode can be produced. To be executed.

Next, the opening correspondence process is executed (S2103). In the opening correspondence process, the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect content in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the hit result is determined. Execute the processing for. For example, the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation hit result, and in the game round immediately before that, the symbol display device 80 does not use the same odd-numbered symbol combination, but the same even-numbered symbol. When the combination is finally stopped and displayed, or when the whale character of FIG. 8 (j) is stopped in the symbol string Z2, the content for making the player recognize that it is a 16R probability variation hit result is included. The effect to be performed is determined as the effect during the opening / closing execution mode this time. That is, in the production of the game times, the hit result with the low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent hit production, the hit promotion effect indicating that the hit is the hit with the high game value is determined as the effect in the open / close execution mode. To do.

As already explained here, in the holding data area 154f of the audio side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game times in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game times. , When the open / close execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 154f are cleared when the open / close execution mode ends. .. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the open / close execution mode as described above. ..

Further, in the opening corresponding process of step 2103, the number of hits after the update in step 2102 is specified, and the effect corresponding to the specified number of hits is set as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode this time.

Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 2103 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2104). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2101: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2105). When it is determined that the release command has been received (S2105: YES), the display side MPU 162 is notified that the variable winning device 56 has been newly started to be released, that is, one round game has been newly started. A release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 for recognition (S2106). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the release command will be described later.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2105: NO), or after the process of transmitting the release command is executed, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S2107). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S2107: YES), the display is displayed so that the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable winning device 56 has been closed, that is, the round game of 1 has been completed. A closure command is sent to the side MPU 162 (S2108). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2107: NO), or after the process of transmitting the closing command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2109). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2109: YES), the ending correspondence process is executed (S2110). In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / losing lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, since the high-probability mode is always set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time.

Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 2110 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2111). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2109: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2112). When it is determined that the notification command is being received (S2112: YES), it means that an event to be notified such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In order to perform the notification, the light emission data reading process is executed (S2113), and the audio output data reading process is executed (S2114). As a result, in the light emission control process (S1904) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission is performed according to the light emission data, and the sound output of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) is performed. In the control process (S1905), the voice output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that the sound is output according to the voice output data. After that, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S2115). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2112: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2116). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. Therefore, when it is determined that the release command has been received (S2116: YES), it means that the event to be notified such as the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 has been canceled. In order to cancel the notification, the release setting process is executed (S2117). After that, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S2118). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2116: NO), or after the release setting process is executed and other corresponding processes are executed (S2119), the main command corresponding process is terminated. In the other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 93. As a result, the demo display is started on the symbol display device 80.

Next, the replacement process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the replacement process.

In the replacement process, first, the information of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is read out (S2501). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit notification non-winning flag and the loss notification winning flag are stored in the slave 1st to 8th holding areas RC1 to RC8 in the read slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b (S2502). .. When it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the losing notification winning flag are stored (S2502: YES), the replacement lottery process is executed (S2503).

In the replacement lottery process, first, the value of the replacement lottery counter is read from the replacement lottery counter area 154g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the replacement lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and after reaching the maximum value. It is configured to be initialized to 0. Then, in the replacement lottery process, whether or not the value of the replacement lottery counter read out corresponds to the replacement winning by referring to the replacement lottery table stored in the replacement lottery table storage area 153c of the audio side ROM 153. Is determined. The probability of winning a replacement is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the replacement lottery table is set so that the probability of winning a replacement is 1/4.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the replacement lottery process is a replacement winning (S2504). Then, when it is determined that the replacement is won (S2504: YES), the replacement command of the corresponding reserved symbol is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, along with information on the smallest number (replacement destination number) in the slave holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, and information on making the holding symbol for the number a holding notification symbol. Sends a replacement command that includes information about the smallest number (replacement source number) in the slave holding area RC # that stores the loss notification winning flag, and information that makes the held symbol for that number a pending non-notified symbol. .. The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the replacement command will be described in detail later, but briefly, when the display side MPU 162 receives the replacement command, the first to eighth reserved symbols in the symbol display device 80 Of the display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the part where the hold notification symbol "●" is displayed is changed to the hold non-notification symbol "○", and the part where the hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed. The one that wins the winning lottery is changed to the hold notification symbol "●" (see FIGS. 49 to 51).

After executing the process of transmitting the replacement command, the information (flag) of the slave holding area RC # of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is updated based on the replacement command (S2506). That is, in the smallest slave holding area RC # in the slave holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, the winning notification non-winning flag is deleted, the winning notification winning flag is stored, and the replaced flag is set. Store. Further, in the smallest slave holding area RC # among the slave holding area RC # in which the loss notification winning flag is stored, the loss notification winning flag is deleted and the loss notification non-winning flag is stored. As a result, in the operation valid lottery process (FIG. 42), the operation notification that expects the hold notification symbol to be replaced after the hold notification symbol is replaced is not displayed, and the troublesomeness due to the frequent operation notification to the player is reduced. It is possible to draw attention to the game with a moderate sense of expectation without making it feel.

When the process of step 2506 is executed, when it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the losing notification winning flag are not stored (S2502: NO), or when it is determined that the replacement is not won (S2504: NO), The operation valid flag stored in the operation valid flag storage area 154c is erased (S2507), and the main replacement process is completed.

<Command correspondence processing executed by the display control device 93>
Next, the command correspondence process executed by the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command received from the voice lamp control device 92 is stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 by the command storage process activated when the command is received. The command correspondence process is a process for executing various controls corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area 164a, which are periodically started in the display side MPU 162 (for example, in a cycle of 4 msec).

The command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time. The processing corresponding to each of these commands can be executed satisfactorily.

Further, in the display side MPU 162, various setting processes (write processing) are performed on the work RAM 164 in the command correspondence process, but in a process different from the command correspondence process, one frame corresponding to the update timing according to the various setting processes. A drawing list for displaying the image of is created, and the created drawing list (internal command) is transmitted to VDP165.
Then, the VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, the image of one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80. As described above, when data is not set in the 1st to 8th unit areas RD1 to RD8 (data meaning a blank is set), it corresponds to the 1st to 8th unit areas RD1 to RD8. In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, no image is displayed, or the background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

In the command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the stop result command and the pattern command, or the stop result command, the pattern command, and the operation notification command are received (S2601). If it is determined that the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command, and operation notification command have been received (S2601: YES), the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command After executing the pattern data table setting process that reads the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the operation notification command from the various data table storage areas 163b of the program ROM 163 and writes it to the work RAM 164 (S2602), this command correspondence process. To finish.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the game round is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round is defined.

As a result, when the operation notification command is received, as shown in FIG. 47, the message "The reserved symbols may be replaced when the button is pressed !?" is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80. , Notifies the player that the operation of the first frame button 26 is effective.

When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command, or the stop result command, the pattern command, and the operation notification command have not been received (S2601: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command has been received (. S2603). If it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2603: YES), the fixed stop setting process is executed (S2604), and then the command corresponding process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, a data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round until the period during the fixed stop display elapses is read from various data table storage areas 163b of the program ROM 163 and the work is performed. The process of writing to the RAM 164 is executed.

When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S2603: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received (S2605). If it is determined that the hold command has been received (S2605: YES), the hold command correspondence process is executed (S2606), and then this command correspondence process is terminated.

Here, the pending command correspondence process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process.

In the hold command correspondence process, first, the total hold number HNx of the total hold number storage area HNX provided in the work RAM 164 is read, and the total hold number HNx is added by 1 (S2701).
Next, it is determined whether or not the hold command is a hold notification command (S2702). If it is determined that the command is a hold notification command (S2702: YES), the hold notification information (hold notification symbol information) is stored in the unit area corresponding to the total number of holds HNx added by 1 in step 2701. The data setting process for the hold notification for writing the hold notification information to the work RAM 164 is executed so that the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * (S2703). After that, the processing corresponding to this hold command is terminated.

For example, if the total number of hold notifications HNx added in step 2701 is "2", the hold notification information is written to the work RAM 164 so that the hold notification information is stored in the second unit area RD2. Further, if the total number of hold notifications HNx added in step 2701 is "4", the hold notification information is written to the work RAM 164 so that the hold notification information is stored in the fourth unit area RD4.

As a result, when the hold notification information is written when the total number of holds HNx is "2", as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the second hold symbol display area Ds2 of the lower display area Ds The hold notification symbol "●" is displayed. On the other hand, when the hold notification information is written when the total number of holds HNx is "4", it is held in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4 of the lower display area Ds as shown in FIG. 48 (b). The notification symbol "●" is displayed. In this case, the player can expect that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur in the case of a game round related to the hold notification symbol "●". -The eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 will also be noted.

When it is determined that it is not a hold notification command (S2702: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is a hold non-notification command, the hold non-notification information (hold non-notification information) is placed in the unit area corresponding to the total number of holds HNx added by 1 in step 2701. Data setting process for hold non-notification to write hold non-notification information to work RAM 164 so that hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the hold non-notification symbol display area Ds * by storing the hold non-notification symbol information). Is executed (S2704). After that, the processing corresponding to this hold command is terminated.

Returning to the description of the command correspondence process (FIG. 44), when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S2605: NO), it is determined whether or not the shift command has been received (S2607). If it is determined that the shift command has been received (S2607: YES), the shift setting process is performed (S2608). In the setting process at the time of shift, the total number of reserved symbols HNx in the total reserved number storage area HNX is subtracted by 1, and the reserved symbol information set in the 1st to 8th unit areas RD1 to RD8 of the reserved symbol display area 167a is used. Information to be shifted to the lower area side is written in the work RAM 164. Specifically, while clearing the reserved symbol information of the first unit area RD1, the second unit area RD2 → the first unit area RD1, the third unit area RD3 → the second unit area RD2, the fourth unit area RD4 → the first. 3 unit area RD3, 5th unit area RD5 → 4th unit area RD4, 6th unit area RD6 → 5th unit area RD5, 7th unit area RD7 → 6th unit area RD6, 8th unit area RD8 → 7th unit Information to be shifted is written so that the reserved symbol information in each unit area RD1 to RD8 is shifted, such as area RD7. As a result, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds, the reserved symbols are shifted one by one to the smaller (lower) reserved symbol display area Ds *. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

If it is determined that the shift command has not been received (S2607: NO), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2609). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2609: YES), the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2610). Terminate command handling processing.

The opening data table is used to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information that defines the processing required for.
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

In the data table for the opening, the contents of the effect are defined during each round game and during the interval period between the round games from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until. Then, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2609: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the open command and the close command has been received (S2611). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2611: YES), the processing corresponding to this command is terminated after the setting processing at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2612). In the setting process at the time of opening and closing, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

When it is determined that the open command and the close command have not been received (S2611: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2613). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2613: YES), the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2614). Terminate command handling processing.

The ending data table is necessary to display one frame of images at each update timing of the images when displaying the moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2613: NO), another corresponding process (S2615) is executed, and then this command corresponding process is terminated.

Next, another corresponding process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another corresponding process.

In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification command is received (S2801). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2801: YES), the notification data setting process is executed (S2802), and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written to the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2801: NO), it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2803). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2803: YES), the processing for clearing the notification data is executed (S2804), and then the corresponding processing for each item is terminated. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data of the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be released is canceled.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2803: NO), it is determined whether or not the replacement command has been received (S2805). If it is determined that the replacement command has been received (S2805: YES), the replacement setting process is executed (S2806), and then the corresponding processing for each item is terminated. In the replacement setting process, as described in step 2505 of FIG. 43, the replacement command includes information on the replacement destination number, information on making the hold symbol corresponding to the number a hold notification symbol, and information on the replacement source number. Since it also contains information that makes the hold symbol corresponding to the number a hold non-notification symbol, the hold notification information is worked so that the hold notification information is stored for the unit area corresponding to the replacement destination number. At the same time as writing to the RAM 164, the hold non-notification information is written to the work RAM 164 so that the hold non-notification information is stored for the unit area corresponding to the replacement source number. As described above, the replacement destination number is the one that won the winning lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the hold notification symbol “●” that does not win the lottery but wins the hold notification lottery is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2 and hits the third hold symbol display area Ds3. The hold non-notification symbol "○" that won the lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the 1st, 4th to 8th hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds4 to Ds8 are not won and are held. It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that was not won in the notification lottery is displayed. Assuming that the replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the third reserved symbol display area Ds3.

Therefore, the display side MPU 162 stores the hold non-notification information and the hold notification information so that the hold notification information is stored in the second unit area RD2 and the hold notification information is stored in the third unit area RD3. Write to work RAM 164.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the reserved non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2, and the reserved notification symbol "●" is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50A, the 5th reserved symbol display area Ds5 is not won in the lottery, but the reserved notification symbol “●” that is won in the reserved notification lottery is displayed, and the 3rd reserved symbol display area Ds3 The hold non-notification symbol "○" that won the lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the 1st, 2nd, 4th, 6th to 8th hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds2, Ds4, It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that did not win the lottery for Ds6 to Ds8 and did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed. If the replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 and the third reserved symbol display area Ds3.

Therefore, the display side MPU 162 stores the hold non-notification information and the hold notification information so that the hold notification information is stored in the fifth unit area RD5 and the hold notification information is stored in the third unit area RD3. Write to work RAM 164.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the reserved non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5, and the reserved notification symbol "●" is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3. To.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the second and fifth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 and Ds5 are not won in the lottery, but the reserved notification symbol “●” that won the reserved notification lottery is displayed. The lottery was won in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, but the reserved non-notified symbol "○" that did not win the reserved notification lottery was displayed, and the first, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1, It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that did not win the lottery for Ds4 and Ds6 to Ds8 and did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed. If the replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command contains the smallest number of the slave holding area RC # in which the loss notification winning flag is stored, that is, the second holding symbol display area Ds2 and the third holding symbol display area. It contains information to replace the reserved symbols of Ds3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the reserved non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2, and the reserved notification symbol "●" is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3. To.

Returning to the explanation of the separate correspondence process (FIG. 46), if it is determined that the replacement command has not been received (S2805: NO), and after executing the other correspondence process (S2807), the present separate correspondence process ends. In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the data table for displaying the demo is stored in various data table storage areas of the program ROM 163. The process of reading from 163b and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. Further, it is determined whether or not the first frame button operation command is received, and if the first frame button operation command is received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is displayed in the program ROM 163. The process of reading from the various data table storage areas 163b and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the game times is not displayed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed. In addition, when a notice character or the like is displayed after the start of the variable display, an effect suggesting a hit expectation regarding the game times is displayed, and when a reach effect is displayed, a chance-up effect of the reach effect is displayed. Will be done.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, after the hold notification symbol "●" is displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with the hold non-notification symbol "○". It is possible to provide new playability. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold notification symbol is replaced, the hold notification symbol is displayed by being replaced with the hold non-notification symbol that wins the winning lottery but does not win the hold notification lottery. Therefore, the player can first play the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol is generated, and when the hold notification symbol is generated, the button operation notification is displayed on the display screen 80a. You can play the game while expecting it, and when the button operation notification is displayed, you can play the game while expecting that the hold notification symbols will be replaced. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notification symbol may be displayed even when the winning lottery is won (FIG. 39, S2203). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the operation notification is generated even when the holding notification symbol that has won the lottery in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 and has won the holding notification lottery is displayed. (Fig. 42, S2402 to S2404). In this case, the hold notification symbols are not replaced, but a hit result is generated in the game rounds related to the hold notification symbols that are not replaced. Therefore, the player can maintain the expectation for the game times for the hold notification symbol even if the hold notification symbol is not replaced.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the winning lottery and the reach lottery are not won, it is difficult to win the hold notification lottery (FIG. 41, S2303). Therefore, if the hold notification symbols are not replaced, a hit result or a reach result is likely to occur in the game times related to the hold notification symbol, and the player's interest in the hold notification symbol decreases. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even in the game times (the number of games since the ending is displayed is 96 to 100 times) near the transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, no particular control is performed. .. That is, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, when the operation notification lottery is won and the replacement lottery is won at the boundary between the game times in the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the hold notification symbol is displayed. May be replaced. As described above, when the hold notification symbols are replaced, the replacement destination is the hold non-notification symbol that won the winning lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery, and there is a high probability that all the winning results will be after the open / close execution mode. In order to shift to the mode, the player can expect that the hold notification symbol will be generated even in the game times near the transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and expect that the hold notification symbol will be replaced. You can pay attention to the game. A specific example of the replacement effect of the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol related to the game times near the transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode will be described in the fourth embodiment below.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be described. For example, in the first embodiment, even if it is determined that the reach lottery is not won (completely out of order), there is a possibility that the third lottery will be performed and the symbol will be a hold notification symbol (FIGS. 41, S2303). , If it is determined that the reach lottery is not won, the hold notification symbol may not be used. That is, the third hold notification lottery process may not be executed. According to this, when the hold notification symbol is replaced, a hit result is generated in the game round related to the hold notification symbol, and even if the hold notification symbol is not replaced, the hit result is obtained in the game round related to the hold notification symbol. Since the result or the reach result is generated, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the hold notification symbol.

Further, in the first embodiment, the replacement process is executed when the operation valid period has elapsed in the operation valid period (FIG. 36, S1907 to S1910), but the first during the operation valid period. If the frame button 26 is not operated, the replacement process may not be performed. According to this, since the replacement process does not occur unless the first frame button 26 is operated, the player can select the occurrence of the replacement effect. That is, the player can select whether to detect in advance whether a hit will occur by generating the replacement effect, or to enjoy the effect without intentionally generating the replacement effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In this configuration, the replacement process is not performed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the operation valid flag may be cleared after the operation valid period has elapsed.

In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the hold notification symbol is not used when it is determined that the reach lottery is not won. That is, it is preferable not to execute the third hold notification lottery process. According to this, if the player does not operate the first frame button 26, the hold notification symbol is displayed as it is, but a hit result or a reach result is generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort in the production.

Further, the operation effective lottery process may not be performed, and the replacement process may be generated at a predetermined timing (during fluctuation, timing across fluctuations, etc.). According to this, since the replacement process is executed at an unexpected timing not intended by the player, the player can enjoy the effect of the lower display area Ds while enjoying the variable display in the upper display area Dm. , You can enjoy a variety of games with both display areas Dm and Ds. Further, as a predetermined timing, for example, when all the flags are stored in the slave 1st to 8th reserved symbol storage areas RC1 to RC8, that is, the 1st to 8th reserved symbols of the symbol display device 80 are displayed. The replacement process may be performed when all the reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Ds1 to Ds8. According to this, when the hold notification symbol is displayed, the player tries to continue the game and display all the hold notification symbols while expecting that the hold notification symbol is replaced. Therefore, the player goes to the game. Can raise interest in.

Further, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), in the second and third hold notification lottery processes (S2302, S2303), the slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b When the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the box and the loss notification winning flag is not stored, the probability of loss notification is higher than when the loss notification winning flag is stored. You may. Similarly, in the operation valid lottery process (FIG. 42), when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored and the loss notification non-winning flag is stored, these flags are stored in the operation notification lottery process (S2404). The probability of being an operation notification may be higher than that in the case where is not stored. According to this, when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, the hold notification symbol is likely to be generated, and the hold notification symbol is easily replaced. For this reason, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the hold notification symbols. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the above, when the replacement command is transmitted by the voice side MPU 152 (FIG. 43, S2505), the smallest number (replacement destination number) in the slave holding area RC # in which the hit notification non-winning flag is stored is related. Information and information on the smallest number (replacement source number) in the slave holding area RC # in which the miss notification winning flag is stored, along with information on making the reserved symbol for the number a hold notification symbol, and for the number. An example of transmitting a replacement command including information that sets a pending symbol as a pending non-notifying symbol has been described. However, the slave holding area RC # that is the replacement source can be changed as appropriate, and may be the largest number (replacement destination number) of the slave holding area RC # in which the loss notification winning flag is stored. That is, for example, to explain with reference to the example of FIG. 51, the hold notification symbol in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 and the hold non-notification symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3 may be exchanged. Further, the slave holding area RC # to be the replacement source may be determined by the lottery process.

Then, in the first embodiment, the display-side MPU 162 may sequentially replace the hold notification symbols in one game (1 variation). For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the hold notification symbol “●” that does not win the lottery but wins the hold notification lottery is displayed in the fifth hold symbol display area Ds5, and hits the second hold symbol display area Ds2. Hold notification symbol "○" that won the lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the 1st, 3rd, 4th, 6th to 8th hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Ds6 It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that did not win the lottery in ~ Ds8 and did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed. Then, when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won by the audio side MPU 152, the display side MPU 162 does not suspend the reserved symbol in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 as shown in FIG. 55 (b). The notification symbol "○" and the reserved symbol in the 4th reserved symbol display area Ds4 are set to the reserved notification symbol "●", and then, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the 4th reserved symbol display area Ds4 is reserved. The symbol is set to the hold non-notification symbol "○" and the hold symbol of the third hold symbol display area Ds3 is set to the hold notification symbol "●", and then, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the third hold symbol display area. The reserved symbol of Ds3 may be set to the reserved non-notification symbol “◯”, and the reserved symbol of the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 may be set to the reserved notification symbol “●”. That is, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with the adjacent hold non-notification symbol in this order. In other words, the consecutive advance notifications may be exchanged in the order of notification. According to this, the player also pays attention to where the hold notification symbol stops, so that the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, although an example of moving the hold notification symbols in order in one game is described here, a hold notification symbol that wins the winning lottery but does not win the hold notification lottery and a hold notification lottery that does not win the winning lottery Depending on the positional relationship with the hold notification symbol that has been won, the hold notification symbol may be sequentially replaced over a plurality of game times. Further, such replacement of the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol may be carried out in the same manner in the following embodiment.

Further, in the hold command setting process (FIG. 32), after setting the hold commands in steps 1502, 1504, and 1505, the process of setting the total number of hold commands for the hold command is executed. May be good. In this case, the voice side MPU 152 may specify the slave hold area RC # of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b based on the information of the total number of holds included in the hold command.

Further, although not specifically described in the first embodiment, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. You may do it, or you may not display it. Then, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, the first to eighth reserved symbols are newly held after the open / close execution mode is completed. When displaying the hold notification symbol in the symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, if the hold notification symbol is displayed before the transition to the open / close execution mode, the hold notification symbol may be displayed as it is, or the hold notification symbol may be displayed as it is. The reserved symbol display area Ds * on which is displayed may be displayed as a reserved non-notified symbol.

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-hold notification lottery process and the replacement process executed by the voice-side MPU 152 are changed with respect to the first embodiment so that the hold notification symbols are replaced in addition to the hold non-notification symbols that win the winning lottery. It is a thing. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configurations of the audio side ROM 153 and the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, the audio side ROM 153 is provided with a reception lottery table storage area 153e in addition to the various areas 153a to 153d. Further, in addition to various areas 154a to 154h, the voice side RAM 154 is provided with a reception lottery counter area 154i.

Next, the configuration of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 57, the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is provided with the acceptance winning flag storage area 216 in addition to the various flag storage areas 211 to 215. The acceptance winning flag storage area 216 is an area in which the acceptance lottery process (FIG. 58, S2307) described later is executed when the hold command is received, and the flag is stored when the acceptance winning is achieved.

Subsequently, the pseudo hold notification process (FIG. 39, S2207) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a pseudo hold notification lottery process. This process is basically the same as the pseudo-hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. 41, and is a hold notification when the pseudo-hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. This is a process in which an acceptance process (S2307 to S2309) that may be replaced with a symbol is added.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58, after storing the out-of-winning information in step 2306, the acceptance lottery is performed (S2307). In this acceptance lottery, first, the value of the acceptance lottery counter is read from the acceptance lottery counter area 154i of the voice side RAM 154. Here, the acceptance lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and after reaching the maximum value. It is configured to be initialized to 0. Then, in the acceptance lottery process, whether or not the value of the acceptance lottery counter read out corresponds to the acceptance winning by referring to the acceptance lottery table stored in the acceptance lottery table storage area 153e of the voice side ROM 153. Is determined. The probability of winning the acceptance is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the acceptance is 1/20 when the command is a hold command corresponding to the loss reach, and 1/100 when the command is not the hold command corresponding to the loss reach. The acceptance lottery table is set so that the acceptance will be won with a probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the acceptance lottery process is acceptance winning (S2308), and if it is determined that acceptance winning is received (S2308: YES), it is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 in step 2306. The acceptance winning information is stored together with the loss notification non-winning information (S2309). After storing the acceptance winning information, or when it is determined that the acceptance lottery is not won (S2308: NO), the pseudo-hold notification lottery process is terminated.

As a result, when the acceptance winning information is stored in step 2309 of the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 58), in step 2211 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 39), the step in the sub-special symbol hold ball storage area 154b The acceptance flag is stored in the acceptance winning flag storage area 216 of the slave holding area RC # corresponding to the total number of pending INx added by 1 in 2201. In step 2211 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 39), when the acceptance winning information is stored in step 2309 of the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 58), only the acceptance flag is stored and the miss notification non-winning flag is set. Do not store.

Subsequently, the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 37, S2007) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the operation effective lottery process. This process is basically the same as the operation-effective lottery process described in FIG. 42, and is different from the operation-valid lottery process described in FIG. 42 in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. This is a process in which a process (S2402a) for determining whether or not the acceptance winning flag is stored in the 1st to 8th holding areas RC1 to RC8 is added.

In the operation valid lottery process, when it is determined that the total number of reserved balls INx is 2 or more (S2401: YES), the slave 1st to 8th holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b are notified. It is determined whether or not the winning flag, the notification non-winning flag, or the accepted winning flag is stored (S2402a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one of the winning notification winning flag or the losing notification winning flag and at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag, the losing notification non-winning flag, or the accepting winning flag is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not at least one hold notification symbol "●" and one hold non-notification symbol "○" are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. Then, when it is determined that the notification winning flag, the notification non-winning flag, or the acceptance winning flag is stored (S2402a: YES), the processes after step 2403 are executed. As a result, even when the hit notification non-winning flag is not stored, if the acceptance winning flag is stored, the operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80 if the operation notification in step 2405 is won.

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the replacement process. This process is basically the same as the replacement process described in FIG. 43, and is different from the replacement process described in FIG. 43 in the sub-first to sub-first in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. 8 This is a process in which the process of determining whether or not the acceptance winning flag is stored in the holding areas RC1 to RC8 (S2502a) is replaced with step 2502 of FIG. 43.

Specifically, in the replacement process, after reading the information of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 (S2501), the slave first to slave eighth hold in the read slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether or not at least one of the hit notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag is stored in the areas RC1 to RC8 and the missed notification winning flag is stored (S2502a).

Then, when it is determined that at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag and the accepting winning flag is stored and the losing notification winning flag is stored (S2502a: YES), the same replacement lottery process as described above is performed. (S2503), and if it is determined that the replacement is won (S2504: YES), the replacement command of the corresponding reserved symbol is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, in this process, when the hit notification non-winning flag and the acceptance notification non-winning flag are stored, the smallest number (replacement) of the slave holding area RC # in which the hit notification non-winning flag is stored. Information about the smallest number (replacement source number) in the slave holding area RC # where the miss notification winning flag is stored, along with the information about (the previous number) and the information that makes the reserved symbol for the number a hold notification symbol. , And a replacement command containing information that makes the reserved symbol for the number a pending non-notified symbol. Further, when only the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, the same replacement command as in the first embodiment is transmitted. Then, when only the acceptance winning flag is stored, the information regarding the smallest number (replacement destination number) in the slave holding area RC # in which the acceptance winning flag is stored, and the reserved symbol for the number are displayed. Along with the information to be the hold notification symbol, the information about the smallest number (replacement source number) in the slave holding area RC # in which the loss notification winning flag is stored, and the hold symbol for that number are set as the hold non-notification symbols. Send a replacement command containing information.

Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. When each command is received, the display-side MPU 162 executes the above processing, and when the replacement command is received, the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the hold notification symbol “●” that does not win the lottery but wins the hold notification lottery is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4, and hits the second hold symbol display area Ds2. Although he did not win the lottery and did not win the hold notification lottery, the hold non-notification symbol "○" that won the acceptance lottery is displayed, and the 1st, 3rd, 5th to 8th hold symbol display areas Ds1, It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that does not win the lottery for Ds3 and Ds5 to Ds8 and does not win the hold notification lottery or the acceptance lottery is displayed. Assuming that the replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed on the display side MPU 162, the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 61 (b), and the fourth hold symbol symbol “●” is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the display area Ds4.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 was not won in the lottery and was not won in the hold notification lottery, but the hold non-notification symbol that won the acceptance lottery " "○" is displayed, the 4th reserved symbol display area Ds4 is hit and the lottery is not won, but the hold notification diagram "●" is displayed, and the 6th reserved symbol display area Ds6 is won, but the lottery is held. The reserved non-notified symbols "○" that did not win the notification lottery are displayed, and the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds5, Ds7, and Ds8 are won. Instead, it is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that did not win in the hold notification lottery or the acceptance lottery is displayed. If the replacement command is received in this state, the hit notification non-winning flag is prioritized in the replacement command when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b as described above. Therefore, the information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the 4th reserved symbol display area Ds4 and the 6th reserved symbol display area Ds6 is included. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed on the display side MPU 162, the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the sixth hold symbol display area Ds6 as shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the fourth hold symbol symbol “●” is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the display area Ds4.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, even if the hold notification symbol "●" is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol "○", the replacement destination does not win the lottery.
That is, it becomes uncertain that a hit result will occur in the game times related to the replaced hold notification symbol. Therefore, the fact that the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol are interchanged and displayed can be regarded as one effect (so-called game chance-up effect), and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the player expects that the hold winning in the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 is displayed as the hold notification symbol (whether the chance is increased), and further, the hold notification symbol is further increased. You can pay attention to the game while expecting whether or not it will be replaced (whether or not you will have more chances). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the acceptance winning flag is more easily stored when the missed reach correspondence hold command is received than when the missed reach correspondence hold command is not received (when other correspondence hold commands are received) (FIG. 58). , S2307). Therefore, when the replacement destination is not won in the winning lottery, the reach result is likely to occur, so that the game can be diversified without deteriorating the display significance of the hold notification symbol.

In addition, when the replacement lottery is won, if both the notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored in the slave 1st to 8th holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. , The hold non-notification symbol corresponding to the slave hold area RC # in which the hit notification non-winning flag is stored is replaced with the hold notification symbol (FIGS. 60, S2505). Therefore, the acceptance winning flag is stored when both the notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored in the slave 1st to 8th holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. Compared to the case where the hold non-notification symbol corresponding to the pending hold area RC # is replaced with the hold notification symbol, for example, a hit result is generated in the game round related to the hold non-notification symbol immediately before the replaced hold notification symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above discomfort.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
A modified example of the second embodiment will be described. For example, in the second embodiment described above, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 58), the acceptance lottery process may not be executed unless the command is a hold command corresponding to the loss reach. According to this, when the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol are exchanged, a hit result is generated in the game round related to the hold notification symbol, or a reach result is generated even if the hit result is not generated. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the replaced hold notification symbol and the game times related to the hold notification symbol.

Further, in the replacement process (FIG. 60), when the replacement lottery is won and the replacement command is transmitted, the replacement is performed when both the notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored in the slave holding area RC #. The preceding reserved area RC # may be determined by lottery.

Further, as in the modification of the first embodiment, if the first frame button 26 is not operated during the operation valid period, the replacement process (FIG. 60) is not performed, and the replacement process (FIG. 60) is performed. Then, the replacement lottery process (S2503) may not be performed. According to this, when the player operates the first frame button 26, if the non-notification winning flag or the acceptance winning flag is stored in the slave holding area RC #, the holding notification symbol is always replaced. However, if the pending non-notification symbol corresponding to the slave holding area RC # in which the acceptance winning flag is stored and the holding notification symbol are exchanged, a winning result will occur in the game times related to the exchanged holding notification symbol. do not. On the other hand, when the hold notification symbol is displayed by winning the winning lottery and also performing the hold notification lottery, the rule that the hold notification symbol is not replaced even if the player operates the first frame button 26. A collapsing effect occurs. That is, it is possible to generate a premier effect (an effect in which a hit result is always generated) in which the hold notification symbols are not replaced even though the first frame button 26 is operated. Therefore, the game can be further diversified, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

(Third Embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game are displayed separately with respect to the first embodiment, so that the player can win a prize at which start port. It is easy to determine whether the game is to be played. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the setting process (FIG. 20, S406) of the hold command triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a setting process of a hold command triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54.
This process is basically the same as the setting of the hold command triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 described in FIG. 32, and the process is basically the same as the setting of the hold command, and the process is to the first start port 54 described in FIG. 32. This is a process in which a process of setting the winning information (S1506) is added to the setting process of the hold command triggered by the winning of.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the hold command setting process triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 54, after setting the hold commands in steps 1502, 1504, and 1505, the first start is applied to the hold command. After setting the information triggered by the winning of the mouth 54 (S1506), the setting process of this hold command is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 1506, which start port is won as a trigger for the hold command set in any of the processes of step 1502, step 1504, and step 1505. Set the information to identify.

Regarding the setting process of the hold command (FIGS. 20, S412) triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55, basically, the winning of the first starting port 54 described with reference to FIG. 63 is the trigger. It is the same as the setting process of the hold command, and the only difference is that the information triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55 is set in the hold command. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice side MPU 152 in the present embodiment will be described.

First, before explaining the hold command correspondence process, the display mode displayed in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, basically, the reserved symbols of the first lottery game are set in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 by the display side MPU 162. "○" is displayed as, and "Δ" is displayed as a reserved symbol of the second lottery game. That is, in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the reserved symbols of the first lottery game and the reserved symbols of the second lottery game are displayed separately. Further, as the reserved symbols of the first and second lottery games, "●" is displayed as the reserved symbols that make the player know in advance that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur.
Hereinafter, as the reserved symbol, the reserved symbol “◯” and the reserved symbol “Δ” will be described as the reserved non-notification symbol (first advance notification), and the reserved symbol “●” will be described as the reserved notification symbol (second advance notification).

Here, as described in the first embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when the winning is won is the case where the winning is triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 and the second. It is different from the case where the winning is won by winning the starting port 55, and the probability of winning the 16R probability variation by winning the winning of the first starting port 54 is the winning of the second starting port 55. It is lower than the probability of winning a 16R probability change as an opportunity (Fig. 16). The 16R probability variation hit result is one of the most advantageous hit results for the player.

Therefore, when the hold notification symbol is displayed, the player displays the hold notification symbol for the hold symbol of the second lottery game rather than displaying the hold notification symbol for the hold symbol of the first lottery game. When it is displayed, the interest in the game times for the hold notification symbol is likely to be higher. In other words, when the hold notification symbol is displayed for the hold symbol of the first lottery game, the game related to the hold notification symbol is displayed as compared with the case where the hold notification symbol is displayed for the hold symbol of the second lottery game. There is a problem that interest in times tends to decrease. That is, when the reserved symbol of the first lottery game becomes the reserved notification symbol, the player may be discouraged even though the expected value as a winning result increases.

Next, the configurations of the slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 65, the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is provided with a winning start opening storage area 217 in addition to the various flag storage areas 211 to 215. As described above, the winning start opening storage area 217 includes information on which starting port 54 or 55 is triggered by the winning command, and therefore which of the starting ports 54 and 55 is based on the information. This is an area in which information for determining whether or not a prize is awarded to the starting ports 54 and 55 is stored.

Subsequently, the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. This process is basically the same process as the hold command corresponding process described in FIG. 39, and is a process of transmitting the hold notification command in step 2209 to the hold command described in FIG. 39. This is a process in which a process of setting the winning start port information is added in the process of transmitting the hold non-notification command in step 2210, and the process of storing the winning start port information (S2211a) is replaced with step 2211 of FIG. ..

As shown in FIG. 66, in the hold command corresponding process, the hold notification command is transmitted in step 2209, and the hold non-notification command is transmitted in step 2210. In these cases, the hold command transmitted from the main MPU 112 is triggered by the information that triggers the winning of the first starting port 54 or the winning of the second starting port 55 as described above. Since the information of either one of the information to be used is included, the hold notification command including the winning start opening information or the hold non-notification command is transmitted based on the information.

As a result, when the display side MPU 162 receives the hold non-notification command, it determines the start ports 54 and 55 in which the game ball has won a prize, and the hold non-notification symbol "holding non-notifying symbol" in the holding symbol display area Ds * of the symbol display device 80. "○" or "△" is displayed. When the hold notification command is transmitted, the hold notification symbol "●" is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * regardless of whether the first start port 54 is awarded or the second start port 55 is won. Is displayed. Therefore, the hold notification command may not include the winning start information.

Next, in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to the total number of holdings INx added by 1 in step 2201 in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, steps 2205 and 2206 of FIG. Various flags corresponding to the notification information stored in the above are stored, and the winning start port information is stored (S2211a).

Subsequently, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the replacement process. This process is basically the same as the replacement process described in FIG. 43, and the replacement process described in FIG. 43 is changed by the starting ports 54 and 55 that have won the replacement lottery process. This is the process (S2508, S2503a, S2503b).

Specifically, in the replacement process, when it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the losing notification non-winning flag are stored (S2502: YES), the slave holding area RC in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored is stored. It is determined whether or not the information of the winning start port storage area 217 of # is the first start port 54 (S2508). Then, when it is determined that the information of the winning start opening storage area 217 is the first starting port 54 (S2508: YES), the first replacement lottery process is executed (S2503a), and the information of the winning start opening storage area 217 is executed. Is not the first start port 54 (S2508: NO), that is, when it is determined that the information of the winning start port storage area 217 is the second start port 55, the second replacement lottery process is executed. (S2503b).

The first and second replacement lottery processes are basically the same as the replacement lottery process described in step 2503 above, and refer to the replacement lottery table stored in the replacement lottery table storage area 153c of the audio side ROM 153. It is determined whether or not the replacement winning is supported, but the tables referred to in the first replacement lottery process and the second replacement lottery process are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the replacement is higher in the second replacement lottery process than in the first replacement lottery process. The probability of winning a replacement is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a replacement in the first replacement lottery process is 1/4, and the probability of winning a replacement in the second replacement lottery process is 1/2. A replacement lottery table is set in. That is, when the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game having a high probability of being advantageous to the player (16R probability variation hit result occurs) is the reserved non-notified symbol, the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game is reserved non-notified. It is easier to win the replacement lottery than when it is a symbol.

Next, when it is determined that the replacement is won (S2504: YES), the replacement command is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, in addition to the various information described in the first embodiment, the replacement command including the winning start port information is transmitted. Then, after executing the processes of step 2506 and step 2507, the main replacement process is completed.

Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. When each command is received, the display-side MPU 162 executes the above processing, and when the replacement command is received, the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, a lottery is won in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2, but the reserved non-notified symbol “Δ” that is not won in the reserved notification lottery is displayed, and the fifth reserved symbol is displayed. Although the lottery is not won in the display area Ds5, the hold notification symbol "●" that won the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbols "○" or "Δ" that did not win the lottery for Ds6 to Ds8 and did not win the hold notification lottery are displayed.

Assuming that the replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed on the display side MPU 162, the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 68 (b), and the fifth hold symbol symbol “●” is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol "Δ" is displayed in the display area Ds5. That is, the hold non-notification symbol and the hold notification symbol related to the second lottery game are exchanged. Since the replacement command also includes the winning start port information, the hold non-notification symbol corresponding to the start port originally displayed in the 5th hold symbol display area Ds5 is displayed in the 5th hold symbol display area Ds5. It may be displayed. That is, in FIG. 68B, the reserved non-notifying symbol “◯” may be displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game are displayed separately, and the player can see the reserved symbol for either the first or second lottery game in which the corresponding game is played. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is (Fig. 64). Further, in the case of a winning result, the probability of winning the 16R probability variation when winning the first starting port 54 is lower than the probability of winning the 16R probability variation when winning the second starting port 55. Therefore, for the player, it is easier to obtain an advantageous result if the player wins the second lottery game.

Therefore, when the hold symbol related to the first lottery game is displayed as the hold notification symbol, the player displays the hold symbol related to the second lottery game as the hold notification symbol even though the probability of winning the result is high. You may think that you were happy that you were done, or you may be disappointed that the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game is not displayed as the reserved notification symbol. That is, when the hold symbol related to the first lottery game is displayed as the hold notification symbol, displaying the hold notification symbol may have an adverse effect. However, in the present embodiment, even if the hold notification symbol is displayed for the first lottery game, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with the hold non-notification symbol for the second lottery game by the replacement process (FIGS. 67, S2503b). ), The player can continue the game while expecting that the hold notification symbols are replaced.
Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. As in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the replacement destination is a hold that wins the winning lottery but does not win the hold notification lottery. Therefore, for example, even if the hold notification symbol related to the second lottery game is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol related to the first lottery game, the player can obtain a hit result with the replaced hold notification symbol, so that the replaced hold notification symbol is generated. You can maintain your interest in the game times related to the design.

Further, when the winning information for the second starting port 55 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 217 of the slave holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, it is easy to win the replacement lottery. (FIG. 67, S2503b). Therefore, when the hold notification symbol is displayed on the hold notification symbol for the first lottery game, the player further wins the replacement lottery (the hold non-notification symbol for the second lottery game is replaced with the hold notification symbol). You can continue to play the game while expecting it.

(First modification of the third embodiment)
The first modification of the third embodiment will be described. For example, in the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 66), in the first hold notification lottery process of step 2203a, when the winning start port information included in the hold command is determined and the second start port 54 is won. May make it difficult to win the notification.

Further, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), when the winning notification non-winning flag triggered by winning the second starting port 54 is stored, the second hold notification lottery process in step 2302 and step 2303 In the third hold notification lottery process, the probability of winning the notification may be increased. Further, in the second hold notification lottery process of step 2302 and the third hold notification lottery process of step 2303, if the first start port 54 is won, the notification may be easily won.

Then, in the operation valid lottery process (FIG. 42), in the operation notification lottery process of step 2404, the winning start port storage area 217 of the slave holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored is moved to the second start port 54. When the information that is the winning of the prize is stored, the probability of winning the operation notification may be increased.

By changing the lottery probability in this way, it becomes easier to replace the hold non-notification symbol related to the second lottery game and the hold notification symbol related to the first lottery game, and when the hold notification symbol is replaced, the replaced hold notification symbol is related. In the game times, a hit result that is advantageous to the player is likely to occur. Therefore, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) caused by replacing the hold notification symbol related to the first lottery game with the hold non-notification symbol related to the second lottery game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

(Second modification of the third embodiment)
A second modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as the reserved symbols of the first and second lottery games, "●" is used as a reserved symbol to make the player know in advance that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur. Although the displayed example has been described, in the reserved symbols of the first and second lottery games, the reserved symbols that make the player know in advance that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur are distinguished. You may do so. For example, as shown in FIG. 69, “●” is displayed as a reserved symbol of the first lottery game to notify the player in advance that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur, and the reach is displayed. A “▲” may be displayed as a pending symbol of the second lottery game that causes the player to detect in advance that a result may occur or a winning result may occur.

According to this, the player can easily determine whether the replaced pending notification symbol is the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game or the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game, and the game can be comfortably played without being confused by the game. Can be continued.

(Fourth Embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the role (suggestion content) of the hold notification symbol is changed between the low probability mode and the high probability mode with respect to the first embodiment. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the reserved symbol in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a reserved symbol related to the first and second lottery games. In addition, in the low probability mode (second game mode, low frequency support mode), "●" is displayed as a reserved symbol to let the player know in advance that a missed reach result occurs or a hit result occurs. Is displayed. That is, in the low probability mode, when "●" is displayed as a reserved symbol, it is determined that at least reach fluctuation occurs regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode (first game mode, high frequency support mode), in the present embodiment, when the reach fluctuation occurs, the hit result is always generated. That is, in the high probability mode, at least when the reserved symbol “●” whose reach fluctuation is confirmed is displayed, a winning result is always generated in the game times related to the reserved symbol. In the following, as the reserved symbol, the reserved symbol "○" will be described as the reserved non-notification symbol (first advance notification), and the reserved symbol "●" will be described as the reserved notification symbol (second advance notification).

Next, the display mode of the upper display area Dm in the symbol display device 80 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the upper display area Dm in the symbol display device 80.

In the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, it is displayed that "in high probability mode" in the high probability mode, and the player can display in the upper display area Dm "high probability mode". By confirming whether or not the message "Medium" is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether the current game times are in the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode. Further, in the upper display area Dm, when the high probability mode is in progress, the remaining number of high probability mode games (77 times remaining in FIG. 70) is also displayed.

In this way, in order to display the display in the high probability mode on the symbol display device 80 and the remaining number of high probability mode games, for example, in the main MPU 112, the high probability mode in the special electric power termination process (FIG. 29) Set a high-probability command as the output target when storing the flag. Then, a high-probability game count counter or the like is provided according to various other counter areas 154h of the voice-side RAM 154 to count the number of games in the high-probability mode, and a command corresponding to the number of games in the high-probability mode is issued to the display side MPU 162. By transmitting to, the display side MPU 162 may display and control whether or not the player is in the high probability mode, and if the player is in the high probability mode, the remaining number of high probability games may be displayed. ..

Next, the confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54. This process is basically the same as the confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port described in FIG. 30, and the confirmation process for the hold notice described in FIG. 30 above. This is a process in which a process (S1315) for determining whether or not the mode is in the low probability mode is added to the process.

Specifically, when it is determined that the winning is not won (S1306: NO), it is determined (estimated) whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode at the time when the game round related to the hold is started is the low probability mode (estimation). S1315). For this determination, for example, the result of the determination in step 1303 is stored in the register of the main MPU 112, and the determination is made based on the information stored in the register. Then, when it is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1315: NO), that is, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, as described above, in the case of the high probability mode, only the case of the hit result is obtained. Since the structure is such that the reach result is generated, the confirmation process for this hold notice is terminated without determining whether or not the reach result is generated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode (S1315: YES), the processes of steps 1311 to 1314 are executed.

The confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55 is the same as the confirmation process for the holding notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 described with reference to FIG. 71. When it is determined that the winning is not won (S1406: NO) with respect to the confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning of the second starting port 54 described with reference to FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the mode is low probability mode. Since only the processing to be performed is added, detailed description is omitted.

Further, although not particularly shown, in the process of grasping the variation display time in step 509 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 22), in the case of the high probability mode, when the result is not a hit, as in the confirmation process for the hold notice. Determines that no reach result occurs.

Next, the pseudo notification lottery process (FIG. 39, S2207) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-hold lottery process. This process is basically the same as the pseudo hold notification lottery process described in FIG. 41, but the third hold notification lottery process (S2303) is different from the pseudo hold notification lottery process described in FIG. 41. It is a process that does not perform.

Specifically, when it is determined that the command is not a hold command corresponding to the loss reach (S2301: NO), the loss notification non-winning information is stored (S2306), and the pseudo hold notification process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, if neither the winning lottery nor the reach lottery is won, the hold notification command is not transmitted. In other words, when the hold notification symbol is displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, a hit result or a reach result is always generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol. .. It should be noted that the detached reach correspondence hold command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 only in the low probability mode as described in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. If all the reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 indicate the lottery result related to the low probability mode, the reserved notification symbol is displayed when the reach result does not occur. Since it differs from the first embodiment only in that it is not performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the high probability mode remains 99 to 8 times, all the reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode. Therefore, when the hold notification symbol is displayed in the 1st to 8th hold notification symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, a winning result is always generated in the game round related to the hold notification symbol. In the present embodiment, in the high-probability mode, the disconnection reach correspondence hold command is not transmitted from the main MPU 112, so that the disconnection notification winning information is not stored. That is, in the high probability mode, the winning lottery is not won, but the hold notification lottery is not won. Therefore, the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42) may not be performed when the high probability mode remains 99 to 8 times.

On the other hand, when the high probability mode is 7 to 1 times remaining, as shown in FIG. 73, the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are set in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. And the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode will be displayed together (mixed). FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a state in which both the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed on the symbol display device 80.

As shown in FIG. 73, for example, when the high probability mode remains three times, the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3, and the fourth ~ Eighth reserved symbols Ds4 to Ds8 display reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode. The symbol display device 80 can be easily determined by the player as an area in which the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode is displayed and an area in which the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode is displayed. As described above, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the background screen of the reserved symbol display area Ds * in which the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed blinks, or the lottery game in the high probability mode is related. The background screen of the reserved symbol display area Ds * where the reserved symbols are displayed and the background screen of the reserved symbol display area Ds * where the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed are different screens (colors). It may be.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the hold non-notification symbol "○" that won the winning lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery is displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2. Although the lottery is not won in the sixth reserved symbol display area Ds6, the reserved notification symbol "●" that has won the reserved notification lottery may be displayed. In this case, assuming that the replacement lottery is won and the display side MPU 162 receives the replacement command, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the sixth reserved symbol display area Ds6. ing. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed on the display side MPU 162, the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the sixth hold symbol symbol “●” is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the display area Ds6. In other words, the hold notification symbol "●", whose reach occurrence was only confirmed in the low probability mode, is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol "○" in the high probability mode, so that the hold notification in the replaced high probability mode is replaced. It is confirmed that a winning result will occur in the game times related to the symbol "●".

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, the hold notification symbol (the hold symbol related to the lottery result in the low probability mode) that exceeds the specified number of times in the high probability mode is the hold non-notification symbol (in the high probability mode) within the specified number of times in the high probability mode. It is possible to give a game property that it may be replaced with a reserved symbol related to the lottery result), and it is possible to diversify the game.

Further, in the high probability mode, the hold notification symbol is displayed only when the winning lottery is won, and in the low probability mode, the hold notification symbol is displayed only when the winning lottery is won or the reach lottery is won. (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 in FIG. 72). Therefore, even if the hold symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed, the player first continues the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol is displayed in the low probability mode, and the player continues the game in the low probability mode. When the hold notification symbol is displayed in, pay attention to the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode. Therefore, even when the number of times of the high probability mode is exceeded, the player's willingness to play can be promoted and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

That is, in the case of a configuration in which the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode and the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode are not exchanged, the player displays the hold symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode. , There is a tendency to stop launching the game ball and watch the game. On the other hand, if the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode and the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode are configured to be interchanged as in the present embodiment, the player holds the hold for a specified number of times in the high probability mode. If all the reserved symbols in the high probability mode are pending non-notified symbols even after the symbols are displayed, the game is continued with the expectation that the reserved notified symbols will be displayed in the low probability mode. Then, when the hold notification symbol is displayed in the low probability mode, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol is displayed in place of the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode. It leads to promotion of motivation to play and also leads to increase of interest in games.

Further, in a gaming machine in which the reserved symbol in the low probability mode and the reserved symbol in the high probability mode are not interchanged, when both the reserved symbol in the low probability mode and the reserved symbol in the high probability mode are displayed, it is low. When the hold notification symbol won in the hold notification lottery is displayed as the hold symbol in the probability mode, the player may be given a feeling of loss or disgust as if he / she is in the high probability mode. For this reason, in a gaming machine in which the reserved symbol in the low probability mode and the reserved symbol in the high probability mode are not exchanged, that is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the reserved symbol in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol in the low probability mode are used. When is displayed together, so-called kinsoku processing is executed, and the reserved symbol in the low probability mode is always set as the reserved non-notified symbol.

However, in such a pachinko machine, the effect (display mode of the reserved symbol) when shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode is fixed, and the player is required to shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. There is a possibility that you will not pay attention to the production of the game and you will get tired of the game early.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by allowing the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode and the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode to be interchanged, it is not necessary to execute the above-mentioned prohibition processing, and at the same time, It is possible to diversify the display mode when both the reserved symbol in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol in the low probability mode are displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
A modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, when the remaining number of times in the high probability mode is 7 to 1, that is, in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed. , When the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode is displayed together, the configuration may be as follows. That is, the voice side MPU 152 prevents the first hold notification lottery process of step 2203 from being performed in the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 39), or makes it difficult to win the hold notification lottery, so that the high probability mode is set. As a hold symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode immediately after the end, when the notification non-winning flag is stored in the slave hold area RC #, the hold notification command is output regardless of whether it is reach or not. To do. When the hold notification command is output in this way, the operation notification command is always output in the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42), and the replacement command is always output in the replacement process (FIG. 43). May be good.
According to this, both the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. In this case, the hold notification symbol related to the low probability mode and the hold non-notification symbol related to the high probability mode are likely to be exchanged. For this reason, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the hold notification symbols in the low probability mode. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, when all the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed, that is, since the number of high probability games is 100 in the present embodiment, the 100th reserved symbol in the high probability mode is displayed. If this is the case, in the opening determination of the electric accessory 63 in the normal drawing control process (S216), the opening may not be won or it may be difficult to win. That is, when all the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed, the electric accessory 63 may not be opened (extended open). Even with such a configuration, when the hold notification symbol is displayed on the hold symbol in the low probability mode, the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode, so that the winning result in the high probability mode is obtained. Can be detected at an early stage, so that it is easy for the player to continue the game even after all the reserved symbols in the high probability mode are displayed.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 55 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the hold notification symbol is replaced with the adjacent hold non-notification symbol, and the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode is held in the high probability mode. You may add an effect such as whether or not it is notified as a symbol. According to this, when the hold notification symbol is displayed in the low probability mode, the player also pays attention to the movement (replacement) such as whether or not the hold notification symbol is notified as the hold symbol in the high probability mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the high probability mode, "△" different from "●" may be displayed as a hold notification symbol for the player to detect in advance that a hit result may occur. .. In this case, it may be determined that a hit result will be obtained when the hold notification symbol "Δ" is replaced, and the replacement process (FIG. 43) may be performed even in the high probability mode.

Further, as an example in which the player can easily determine the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode, the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the low probability mode You may change the basic shape with the reserved symbol about the lottery game in. For example, in the low probability mode, "○" may be displayed as a basic reserved symbol, and in the high probability mode, "Δ" may be displayed as a basic reserved symbol.

(Fifth Embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hold notification symbols are used with respect to the first embodiment. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the reserved symbol in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a reserved symbol related to the first and second lottery games. In addition, "●" and "◎" are displayed as reserved symbols to let the player know in advance that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur. In addition, when the reserved symbol "◎" is displayed, the probability of winning the game times related to the reserved symbol is higher than when the reserved symbol "●" is displayed. That is, the player pays attention to the game while expecting a winning result higher when the reserved symbol "◎" is displayed than when the reserved symbol "●" is displayed. In the following, the reserved symbol "○" is designated as the reserved non-notification symbol (first advance notification), the reserved symbol "◎" is designated as the first reserved notification symbol (second higher-ranking notification), and the reserved symbol "●" is second reserved. This will be described as a notification symbol (second lower destination notification).

Next, the configurations of the audio side ROM 153 and the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

As shown in FIG. 74, the audio side ROM 153 is provided with a distribution lottery table storage area 153f in addition to the various areas 153a to 153d. Further, in addition to various areas 154a to 154h, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with a distribution lottery counter area 154j.

Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, instead of the miss notification winning flag storage area 213 in the first embodiment, the first miss notification winning flag storage area 213a and the second miss A notification winning flag storage area 213b is provided.
The first loss notification winning flag storage area 213a is an area in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored when the first hold notification is won, although the winning lottery is not won, and the second loss notification winning flag storage area 213b. Is an area in which the second miss notification winning flag is stored when the second hold notification is won, although the winning lottery is not won.

Next, the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. This process is basically the same as the hold command corresponding process described in FIG. 39, and when the notification is won for the hold command corresponding process described in FIG. 39 (S2208: YES), This is a process to which the distribution processing (S2212 to S2216) of the hold notification symbol is added.

Specifically, when it is determined that there is notification winning information (S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not the command is a hit response hold command (S2212). Then, when it is determined that the command is a winning response hold command (S2212: YES), the first distribution lottery process is executed (S2213). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit-corresponding hold command (S2212: NO), it is determined whether or not it is a miss-reach-corresponding hold command (S2214), and if it is determined that it is a miss-reach-corresponding hold command (S2214). S2214: YES), the second distribution lottery process is executed (S2215).

In the first and second distribution lottery processes, first, the value of the distribution lottery counter is read from the distribution lottery counter area 154j provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the distribution lottery counter is configured to be able to store counter values of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and has reached the maximum value. It is configured to be initialized to 0 later. Then, in the first and second distribution lottery processing, the distribution lottery table stored in the distribution lottery table storage area 153f of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to, and the read counter value is the first hold notification symbol. Judge whether or not you have won. The probability of winning the first hold notification symbol is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, in the first distribution lottery process (when the winning correspondence hold command is used), there is a 9/10 probability that the first hold notification symbol will be won. The distribution lottery table is set so that the winners will be won. Further, in the second distribution lottery process (when the command is a hold command corresponding to the loss reach), the distribution lottery table is set so that the first hold notification symbol is won with a probability of 1/10. That is, the first hold notification symbol is more likely to be displayed as the hold notification symbol in the case of the hit correspondence hold command than in the case of the missed reach correspondence hold command.

Next, it is determined whether or not the first hold notification has been won (S2216), and if it is determined that the first hold notification has been won (S2216: YES), the first hold notification command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. (S2209a). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first hold notification has not been won (S2216: NO), and when it is determined that the command is not a hold command corresponding to the missed reach (S2214: NO), the second hold notification command is sent to the display side MPU 162. Transmit (S2209b). After that, in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to the total number of reservations INx added by 1 in step 2201 in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, the information stored in step 2205 and step 2206 of FIG. 76, step 2305 of FIG. 41, After storing the information stored in step 2306 and the corresponding flags based on the determination results in steps 2214 and 2216 (S2211), the pending command correspondence process ends. Explaining the difference from the first embodiment in the process of step 2211, when the process of step 2205 is executed, the winning notification winning flag is stored regardless of the determination result of step 2216. Further, when it is determined in step 2214 that the command is not a hold command corresponding to a missed reach, or when it is determined in step 2214 that the command is a hold command corresponding to a missed reach, but it is determined in step 2216 that the first hold notification is not won. The second miss notification winning flag is stored. Then, when it is determined in step 2214 that the command is a hold command corresponding to the loss reach and it is determined in step 2216 that the first hold notification is won, the first loss notification winning flag is stored.

As a result, in the symbol display device 80, the first hold notification symbol "◎" is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * corresponding to the slave hold area RC # in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored, and the second loss notification symbol is displayed. The second hold notification symbol "○" is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * corresponding to the slave hold area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored.

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described. The replacement process is basically the same process as the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43. Explaining the difference from the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43, when the replacement command is transmitted (S2505), when only the first loss notification winning flag is stored as the replacement source information, the first The information corresponding to the smallest number of the slave holding area RC # in which the loss notification winning flag is stored is transmitted. Further, when only the second missed notification winning flag is stored as the replacement source information, the information corresponding to the smallest number of the slave holding area RC # in which the second missed notification winning flag is stored is transmitted. .. Then, when the first loss notification winning flag and the second loss notification winning flag are stored as the replacement source information, the slave holding area RC # and the second loss in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored are stored. The information corresponding to the smallest number in the slave holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored is transmitted.

Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. When each command is received, the display-side MPU 162 executes the above processing, and when the replacement command is received, the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), a hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in which the lottery is won in the second hold symbol display area Ds2 but the hold notification lottery is not won, and the fifth hold symbol is displayed. The second hold notification symbol "●" that won the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the 7th hold symbol display area Ds7 does not win the lottery, but the first hold notification lottery won. The hold notification symbol "◎" is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth, and eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Ds6, and Ds8 are not won in the lottery, and the hold notification symbol is also won. It is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol "○" that was not displayed is displayed.

Here, a problem when a plurality of hold notification symbols are displayed in this way will be described. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when a plurality of hold notification symbols are displayed, the first hold notification symbol with a high expectation that a hit result will occur in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. A “◎” and a second hold notification symbol “●” with a low expectation that a hit result may occur may be displayed at the same time. In this case, in general, the player has a plurality of players between the first hold notification symbol "◎" having a high expectation of generating a hit result and the second hold notification symbol "●" having a low expectation of generating a hit result. When the hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed, there is a tendency to watch the game result with some expectation even in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol "●", which has a low expectation that a hit result will occur. It is in. However, in general, when a player displays a first hold notification symbol "◎" with a high expectation that a hit result will occur immediately after a second hold notification symbol "●" with a low expectation that a hit result will occur. , There is a tendency to lose interest in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol "●", which has a low expectation that a hit result will occur, and the first hold notification symbol "◎", which has a high expectation that a hit result will occur early. There is a tendency to want to move to the game times. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest in the first and second hold notification symbols cannot be fully enjoyed. That is, if the reliability of the hold notification symbol is notified too accurately, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the interest in the hold notification symbol. It is also conceivable to configure the configuration so that the first hold notification symbol "◎" with a high expectation of a hit result and the second hold notification symbol "●" with a low expectation of a hit result are not displayed at the same time. However, if one of the hold notification symbols is displayed and the other hold notification symbol is not displayed, the subsequent hold notification symbol when the hold notification symbol is displayed will always be the hold non-notification symbol, and the hold notification will be displayed. In the first place, the significance of making the player expect the result to be generated by the design is diminished.

Further, when there are a plurality of hold notification symbols for the player to detect in advance that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur, the hold symbol shifts the first to eighth symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. When a hit result is generated, the hold notification symbol with a low expectation is changed to a hold notification symbol with a high expectation that a hit result is generated (for example, the second hold notification symbol "●" is changed to the first hold notification symbol. There is a configuration (changed to "◎"). However, in this configuration, in order to change to a hold notification symbol with a high expectation that a hit result is generated, a hold notification symbol with a low expectation that is a hit result frequently appears, and a hold notification with a low expectation that a hit result is generated. Frequent appearance of symbols further diminishes interest in game times for hold notification symbols with low expectations for hitting.

As described above, there are various problems when displaying a plurality of hold notification symbols having different expectations for producing a hit result as the hold symbol, but in the present embodiment, the hold notification symbol may be replaced by performing the replacement process. By making it exist, the above problems can be solved.

Specifically, assuming that the replacement command is received in the state of FIG. 77A, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5. Has been. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed on the display side MPU 162, the second hold notification symbol "●" is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 77 (b), and the fifth hold notification symbol "●" is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol "○" is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds5. Then, in the present embodiment, when the hold notification symbols are exchanged, it is determined that a winning result will be obtained in the exchanged game times. Therefore, even if the second hold notification symbol "●" is displayed, the player can continue the game with the expectation that it will be replaced, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, even if the second hold notification symbol has a low expectation that a winning result will occur, the winning lottery will be won, but it may be replaced with the holding non-notifying symbol that did not win the hold notification lottery (). FIG. 77). Therefore, even if the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol are displayed at the same time, the player can continue the game while expecting that the second hold notification symbol is replaced with another hold non-notification symbol. .. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, with respect to the first hold notification symbol having a high expectation that a hit result will be generated, since the expectation that a hit result will be generated is high even if the symbol is not replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, attention to the game can be maintained as it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold notification symbol is displayed only when the winning lottery is won or when the reach lottery is won (FIGS. 76, S2213, S2215). Therefore, even though the first hold notification symbol is displayed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the production that the reach result does not occur in the game times related to the first hold notification symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the winning lottery is won, it may be displayed by the second hold notification symbol (FIGS. 76, S2213). Therefore, even if the second hold notification symbol is not replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, a hit result may occur in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol, so that the second hold notification symbol that is not replaced may occur. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game times related to.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
A modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. For example, when the replacement command is transmitted (FIG. 43, S2505), if the first miss notification winning flag and the second miss notification winning flag are stored, the subordinate hold in which the first miss notification winning flag is stored is stored. The information corresponding to the smallest number in the area RC # may be transmitted, or the information corresponding to the smallest number in the slave holding area RC # in which the second miss notification winning flag is stored may be transmitted. It may be decided by executing a predetermined lottery.

Further, a plurality of hold notification symbols may be adopted, and each hold notification symbol may have a different hit expectation. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the hold notification symbol by allowing even the hold notification symbol with the lowest expectation of hit to be replaced.

Further, the replacement hold notification symbol may be configured only with the second hold notification symbol. According to this, when the second hold notification symbol is displayed, the player continues the game while expecting that the second hold notification symbol is replaced, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, even if it is a hit result as in the fifth embodiment, if it is possible to display it with the second hold notification symbol, the second is not replaced. Since a winning result may be obtained in the game times related to the hold notification symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol even if the second hold notification symbol is not replaced. ..

Further, the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol may be interchanged. By making it possible for the hold notification symbols to be exchanged with each other in this way, it is possible to further diversify the game. In this case, when both the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol are displayed, for example, the first hold notification symbol does not win the winning lottery, and the second hold notification symbol wins the winning lottery. In this case, the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol may be exchanged.

Then, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), in the second and third hold notification lottery processes (S2302, S2303), the slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b When the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the box and the first and second loss notification winning flags are not stored, the loss notification is considered as compared with the case where the first and second loss notification winning flags are stored. You may try to increase the probability of becoming. Similarly, in the operation valid lottery process (FIG. 42), when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored and one of the first and second miss notification non-winning flags is stored, the operation notification lottery process is performed. In (S2404), the probability of operation notification may be higher than in the case where these flags are not stored. According to this, when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, the first hold notification symbol or the second hold notification symbol is likely to be generated, and the hold notification symbol is easily replaced. For this reason, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the hold notification symbols. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

(Sixth Embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the character symbol is displayed as the hold notification symbol with respect to the first embodiment, and a predetermined effect display is executed in the game times related to the character symbol. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. 78 and 79 are diagrams for explaining a display mode of the symbol display device 80.

In the present embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a reserved symbol related to the first and second lottery games. In addition, the boy's character symbol is displayed as a reserved symbol that makes the player know in advance that a hit result may occur. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), a boy character symbol is displayed as a reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3. In this case, in the game round related to the boy's character symbol, the boy's character symbol is displayed in the center of the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), unlike the normal effect. At the same time, the enemy character symbol is displayed, and the effect (special effect) in which the boy character symbol and the enemy character symbol confront each other is displayed. Then, when a hit result occurs (when shifting to the open / close execution mode), an effect (advantageous content) in which the boy's character symbol wins over the enemy character symbol is displayed. On the other hand, if the hit result does not occur, an effect (non-advantageous content) in which the boy's character symbol is defeated by the enemy character symbol is displayed. At this time, the variation display of the special symbol is displayed small on the lower right side of the upper display area Dm in the front view (in FIG. 78 (b), the arrow indicates the variation display of the special symbol). As a result, the player can confirm that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner while paying attention to the effect in which the boy's character symbol and the enemy character symbol confront each other.

When a boy's character symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *, the two reserved symbol display areas Ds * after the boy's character symbol are displayed as a support zone (special area) EZ. For example, in FIG. 78A, since the boy's character symbol is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, the fourth and fifth reserved symbol display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are displayed as support zones. Further, the display of the support zone is shifted at the same time when the reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * is shifted to the lower area side. That is, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the effect of the game times related to the boy's character symbol is displayed on the symbol display device 80, the first and second reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2 are supported. Displayed as Zone EZ. Further, when the boy's character symbol is displayed in the eighth reserved symbol display area Ds8, the support zone EZ is displayed when the boy's character symbol is shifted to the lower area side.

Further, when the boy's character symbol is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the girl's character symbol may be displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * after the support zone EZ. This girl's character symbol is displayed as a symbol that may support the boy's character symbol when displayed in the support zone EZ. That is, when the character symbol of the girl is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ as shown in FIG. 79 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the girl is shown in FIG. 80. The effect that the character symbol of is confronted with the enemy character symbol together with the boy's character symbol is displayed. If the girl's character symbol is not replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, in the game round related to the boy's character symbol, only the boy's character symbol is used as the enemy character. The effect of fighting the symbol is displayed, and the normal effect is displayed in the game times related to the girl's character symbol.

With such a display mode, the player continues the game while expecting that the girl's character symbol is displayed when the boy's character symbol is displayed, and the girl's character symbol is displayed. In that case, the game will be focused on while expecting the girl's character pattern to enter the support zone EZ. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower display area Ds is provided with the execution pending symbol display area Ds0 in addition to the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The execution pending symbol display area Ds0 is an area showing the reserved symbols related to the fluctuation of the symbol display device 80. For example, as described above, in the game round related to the boy's character symbol, when the effect of the boy's character symbol confronting the enemy character symbol is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, the execution is suspended. A boy's character symbol is displayed in the symbol display area Ds0 (see FIG. 78 (b)).

In the following, as the reserved symbol, the reserved symbol “◯” will be described as the reserved non-notification symbol (first advance notification). Further, the boy's character symbol is also referred to as a first hold notification symbol (second advance notification), and the girl's character symbol is also referred to as a second hold notification symbol (third advance notification).

Next, a configuration for implementing the display mode displayed by the symbol display device 80 will be described.

First, the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 will be described. The sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIG. 74 (fifth embodiment), but the first missed notification winning flag storage area 213a does not win the winning lottery described later. Is an area in which the first missed notification winning flag is stored when the player wins the second hold notification lottery, and the second missed notification winning flag storage area 213b is not won in the winning lottery described later, but is in the third hold notification lottery. This is the area where the second miss notification winning flag is stored when a winner is won.

Further, the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the winning notification winning flag storage area 211 wins the winning lottery and also wins the holding notification lottery (the boy's character symbol is displayed). This is the area where the notification winning flag is stored. The winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212 is an area in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored when the winning lottery is won but the holding notification non-winning symbol is not won (when the holding non-notifying symbol is displayed). The first loss notification winning flag storage area 213a is an area in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored when the second hold notification lottery is won (when the boy's character symbol is displayed), although the winning lottery is not won. Is. The second loss notification winning flag storage area 213b is an area in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored when the third hold notification lottery is won (when the girl's character symbol is displayed), although the winning lottery is not won. Is. The loss notification non-winning flag storage area 214 is an area in which the loss notification non-winning flag is stored when the winning lottery is not won and the hold notification non-winning symbol is not won (when the hold non-notification symbol is displayed). is there.

Next, the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. This process is basically the same as the hold command correspondence process described with reference to FIG. 39, and the character symbol of the boy is mainly displayed for the hold command correspondence process described with reference to FIG. 39. This is a process in which the process (S2218, S2203) of whether or not to display the boy's character symbol is executed after determining whether or not the character symbol is displayed.

Specifically, first, the information of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is read out (S2217). Then, after the total number of reservations INx is added by 1 (S2201), one of INx-1 and INx-2 (INx is the total number of reservations added by 1 in step 2201) in the slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether or not the notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored in the corresponding pending area RC # (S2218). That is, for example, when the total number of hold INx added by 1 in step 2201 is 4, whether or not the notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored in the second and third holding areas RC2 and RC3. Is determined. In other words, when the hold symbol corresponding to the hold command is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4, the boy character symbol is displayed in one of the second and third hold symbol display areas Ds2 and Ds3. Judge whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the hold symbol corresponding to the hold command is displayed in the support zone EZ.

Then, after determining whether or not the hit notification winning flag or the first miss notification winning flag is stored in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 in step 2218, the hit correspondence hold command is used. It is determined whether or not there is (S2202a, S2202b). Neither the hit notification winning flag nor the first miss notification winning flag is stored in either the slave holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 or INx-2 (S2218: NO), but it is a hit correspondence hold command. If it is determined (S2202a: YES), the first hold notification lottery process (S2203) for whether or not to display the boy's character symbol as the hold symbol is executed. The first hold notification lottery process is the same as the first hold notification lottery process described in the first embodiment, but in the present embodiment, the hold notification lottery is performed so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/4. Table is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the first hold notification lottery process is the notification winning (S2204). Then, when it is determined that the notification is won (S2204: YES), the winning notification winning information is stored (S2205), and when it is determined that the notification is not won (S2204: NO), the winning notification non-winning information is stored. Remember (S2206).

Further, when it is determined that the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is not stored in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 and the command is not a hit correspondence hold command (S2202a: NO). ), The pseudo hold notification lottery process is executed (S2207).

Here, the pseudo-hold notification lottery process (S2207) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a pseudo hold notification lottery process. This process is basically the same as the pseudo-hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. 41, and the character symbol is mainly displayed with respect to the pseudo-hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. 41. This is a process in which the process (S2310, S2302, S2303) of whether or not to display the character symbol is executed after determining whether or not the character symbol is displayed.

In the pseudo hold notification lottery process, first, based on the information read in step 2217 in the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 81), the notification winning flag or the first loss is applied to the slave 1st to 8th hold areas RC1 to RC8. It is determined whether or not at least one notification winning flag is stored (S2310). That is, in step 2218 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 81), it is determined that the notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is not stored in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored in at least one of the other slave holding areas (subordinate holding area before INx-3) RC #. .. That is, it is determined whether or not the boy's character symbol is displayed.

If it is determined that none of the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored (S2310: NO), it is determined whether or not the command is a hold command for loss reach (S2301), and the loss reach is reached. If it is determined that the command is a corresponding hold command (S2301: YES), a second hold notification lottery process for whether or not to display the boy's character symbol is executed (S2302). This second hold notification lottery process is basically the same process as the second hold notification lottery process, but in the present embodiment, the hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/20. Is set. Then, when it is determined that the second hold notification lottery has been won (S2304a: YES), the first loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2305a).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored (S2310: YES), it is determined whether or not the second loss notification winning flag is stored (S2311). .. That is, when the boy's character symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *, it is determined whether or not the girl's character symbol is already displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *.

Then, when it is determined that the second missed notification winning flag is not stored (S2311: NO), the third hold notification lottery process for drawing whether or not to display the character symbol of the girl is executed (S2303). This third hold notification lottery process is basically the same process as the third hold notification lottery process, but in the present embodiment, the hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/4. Is set. Then, when it is determined that the third hold notification lottery has been won (S2304b: YES), the second loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2305b).

When it is determined that the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is not stored and the command is not a hold command corresponding to the loss reach (S2301: NO), the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored. However, if it is determined that the second missed notification winning flag is already stored (S2311: YES), the missed notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 (S2306). That is, when the boy's character symbol is not displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the boy's character symbol is displayed only when the reach result occurs, and the boy's character symbol is displayed. When it is displayed, multiple girl character symbols are not displayed. Further, when it is determined that the second hold notification has not been won (S2304a: NO) and when it is determined that the third hold notification lottery has not been won (S2304b: NO), the register of the voice side MPU 152 is also set. The loss notification non-winning information is stored (S2306).

Returning to the explanation of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 81), the notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 (S2218: YES). If it is determined that the command is a hit correspondence hold command (S2202b: YES), the hit notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 (S2206). On the other hand, when the hit notification winning flag or the first miss notification winning flag is stored in the slave hold area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 (S2218: YES), but it is determined that the command is not a hit correspondence hold command. (S2202b: NO), the loss notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2219). That is, when the hold symbol corresponding to the hold command is displayed in the support zone EZ of the symbol display device 80, the lottery for the hold notification is not performed.

After executing the processes of step 2205, step 2206, step 2219 of FIG. 81, step 2305a, step 2305b, and step 2306 of FIG. 82, the information stored in these processes is added to the hit notification winning information or the first loss notification winning. It is determined whether or not there is information (S2208a). Then, when it is determined that there is the winning notification winning information or the first losing notification winning information (S2208a: YES), the first hold notification command is transmitted (S2209a). If it is determined that there is no hit notification winning information or first loss notification winning information (S2208a: NO), it is determined whether or not there is second loss notification winning information (S2208b), and the second loss notification winning information is displayed. If it is determined that there is (S2208b: YES), the second hold notification command is transmitted (S2209b). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no second miss notification winning information (S2208b: NO), a hold non-notification command is transmitted (S2210). Subsequently, in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to the total number of holdings INx added by 1 in step 2201 in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, step 2205, step 2206, step 2219 in FIG. 81, step 2305a in FIG. 82, Various flags corresponding to the information stored in step 2305b and step 2306 are stored (S2211), and then the pending command correspondence process is terminated. Explaining the difference from the first embodiment in the process of step 2211, when it is determined in step 2208a that there is the first loss notification winning information, the first loss notification winning flag is stored. Further, in step 2208b, when it is determined that there is the second loss notification winning information, the second loss notification winning flag is stored.

Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the first hold notification command, the boy's character symbol is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds *, and when the display side MPU 162 receives the second hold notification command, the girl's character symbol is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds *. When it is displayed and the hold non-notification command is received, the process of displaying the hold non-notification symbol in the hold symbol display area Ds * is executed (FIGS. 78 (a) and 79 (a)). Further, when the display side MPU 162 receives the first hold notification command, the display side MPU 162 displays the two areas behind the hold symbol display area Ds * in which the boy's character symbol for the first hold notification command is displayed as the support zone EZ. The process is executed (FIGS. 78 and 79).

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the replacement process. This process is basically the same as the replacement process described in FIG. 43, and the replacement process (S2509 to S2514) of the girl's character symbol is shown with respect to the replacement process described in FIG. 43. This is a process replaced with step 2502 to step 2504 of 43. In the present embodiment, although not particularly shown, the operation valid lottery process of step 2007 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37) is not performed, and the operation valid of steps 1907 to 1909 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36). The configuration is such that the determination process of whether or not it is during the period is not performed. That is, this replacement process is performed immediately after the timer update process of step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) is executed.

In the replacement process, after reading the information of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b (S2501), the second deviation is made in the slave 1st to slave 8th holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether or not the notification winning flag is stored, and if the second missed notification winning flag is stored, it is determined whether or not the replaced flag is stored in the slave holding area RC # (S2509). ). In the case where the second miss notification winning flag is stored and the replaced flag is not stored, both the boy's character symbol and the girl's character symbol are stored as shown in FIG. 79 (a). In the displayed state, the girl's character symbol is not replaced with another reserved symbol. Further, the replaced flag is stored in the process of step 2506 described later.

If it is determined that the second miss notification winning flag is stored and the replaced flag is not stored (S2509: YES), the notification is won in the slave 1st to slave 8 holding areas RC1 to RC8. It is determined whether or not the flag is stored (S2510). That is, since the boy's character symbol is displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, whether or not the game times related to the reserved symbol on which the boy's character symbol is displayed is the winning result. To judge. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second miss notification winning flag is stored but the replacement flag is also stored (S2509: NO), the main replacement process is terminated as it is. Even if it is determined that the second miss notification winning flag is not stored, the main replacement process is terminated as it is.

Then, when it is determined that the winning notification winning flag is stored (S2510: YES), the first replacement command is transmitted (S2505a). Specifically, in this process, assuming that the smallest number of the slave holding area RC # in which the winning notification winning flag is stored is INa, the information regarding the number of INa + 1 or INa + 2 and the holding symbol for the number are displayed. Along with the information to be used as the girl's character symbol (second hold notification symbol), the information on the number related to the slave hold area RC # in which the second miss notification winning flag is stored, and the hold symbol for that number are set as hold non-notification symbols. Send the first replacement command containing the information. That is, a command is transmitted to replace the girl's character symbol with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. One of the information regarding the number of INa + 1 or INa + 2 to be replaced is selected by lottery or the like.

When it is determined that the winning notification winning flag is not stored (S2510: NO), the reserved symbol display area Ds * on which the boy's character symbol is displayed and the corresponding reserved area RC # are the first to be missed. The notification winning flag is stored. Therefore, whether or not the notification non-winning flag is stored in the slave holding area RC # of INb + 1 or INb + 2, with the smallest number of the slave holding area RC # in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored as INb. Is determined (S2511). That is, when the boy's character symbol is displayed as a reserved symbol in the reserved symbol display area Ds *, the two reserved symbol display areas Ds * after the reserved symbol display area Ds * are set as the support zone EZ. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the hold non-notification symbol that causes the hit result is displayed in the support zone EZ.

Then, when it is determined that the hit notification non-winning flag is stored (S2511: YES), the second replacement command is transmitted (S2505b). Specifically, in this process, the information regarding the smallest number of the slave holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored and the holding symbol for the number are converted into the girl's character symbol (second holding notification symbol). The second replacement command including the information on the number related to the slave holding area RC # in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored and the information on the reserved symbol for the number as the reserved non-notified symbol is transmitted. That is, a second replacement command is transmitted to replace the girl's character symbol with the reserved symbol in which the hit result occurs in the support zone EZ.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit notification non-winning flag is not stored (S2511: NO), it is determined whether or not the replacement is possible (S2512). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an off-notification non-winning flag stored in the slave holding area RC # corresponding to the holding symbol after the support zone EZ. That is, it is determined whether or not a reserved non-notifying symbol that does not win the lottery is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * after the support zone EZ. Then, when it is determined that the replacement is possible (S2512: YES), the replacement lottery process similar to that in step 2503 is executed (2513), and it is determined whether or not the replacement is won (S2514).

If it is determined that the replacement is won (S2514: YES), the third replacement command is transmitted (S2505c). Specifically, in this process, in the symbol display device 80, the information on the replacement destination number and the reserved symbol for the number are used as the second reserved notification symbol so that the girl's character symbol does not enter the support zone EZ. A third replacement command including information on the number related to the slave holding area RC # in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored and information on the reserved symbol for the number as the reserved non-notified symbol is transmitted. That is, in the third replacement command, the number of the subordinate holding area RC #, which is the receiving destination, is appropriately determined by lottery so as not to enter the support zone EZ.

After the processing of steps 2505a to 2505c is completed, the information of the special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is updated according to the same procedure as in step 2506 based on the first to third replacement commands (S2506). Specifically, in the slave holding area RC # to be replaced, the flag already stored is deleted, the hit notification winning flag or the second loss notification winning flag is stored, and the replaced flag is also stored. .. Further, in the slave holding area RC # in which the second missed notification winning flag is stored, the second missed notification winning flag is deleted and the missed notification non-winning flag is stored. Then, when the process of step 2506 is completed, when it is determined that the replacement is not possible (S2512: NO), or when it is determined that the replacement is not won (S2514: NO), the main replacement process is terminated.

Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the first to third replacement commands, the replacement setting process (FIG. 46, S2806) is executed. In this embodiment, as described in the modified example of the first embodiment, the girl character symbols (second hold notification symbol) are sequentially replaced in one game or a plurality of game times (see FIG. 55). ). That is, the girl's character symbol is moved so as to produce an effect such as whether or not the girl's character symbol enters the support zone EZ, so that the player's attention can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the symbol display device 80, a boy character symbol (first hold notification symbol) is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, and the fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed. It is assumed that the areas Ds4 and Ds5 are displayed as the support zone EZ, and the girl character symbol (second hold notification symbol) is displayed in the seventh reserved symbol display area Ds7.

In this state, if the boy's character symbol wins the lottery, the voice side MPU 152 transmits the first replacement command. Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the first replacement command, the display side MPU 162 puts the girl character symbol displayed in the 7th reserved symbol display area Ds7 on hold displayed in the 5th to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds5 to Ds8. Finally, as shown in FIG. 84B, for example, a replacement setting process is performed in which the reserved non-notified symbol is replaced with the non-notified symbol and displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5. That is, the replacement setting process is performed so that the character symbol of the girl is displayed as the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. The route for replacing the girl's character symbol is the number of reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 and the reserved symbol display area Ds * in which the boy's character symbol is displayed. It is preferable to change according to the number of. Further, such control is also possible in the replacement setting process when the second and third replacement commands described later are received.

Then, in the game round related to the boy's character symbol, as shown in FIG. 80, the boy's character symbol is displayed in the upper display area Dm, and the girl's character symbol displayed in the support zone EZ is displayed on the upper side. It is displayed in the area Dm, and an effect in which the boy's character symbol and the girl's character symbol cooperate to confront the enemy character symbol is displayed. Then, the winning effect is displayed in the confronting effect, and the winning result is displayed. When the girl's character symbol is displayed in the upper display area Dm, the reserved non-notification symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * where the girl's character symbol is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the boy's character symbol does not win the lottery, but the reserved non-notifying symbol displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 in the support zone EZ wins. If the lottery is won, a second replacement command is transmitted. Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the second replacement command, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the girl's character symbol is transferred to the reserved symbol in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 (in the winning lottery) as shown in FIG. 85 (b). Performs processing to replace and display the winning non-notification symbol).

Then, in the game round related to the boy's character symbol, as shown in FIG. 80, the boy's character symbol is displayed in the upper display area Dm, and the girl's character symbol displayed in the support zone EZ is displayed on the upper side. It is displayed in the area Dm, and the effect that the boy's character symbol and the girl's character symbol cooperate to confront the enemy character symbol is displayed, but the game times that win the actual winning lottery are the game times related to the girl's reserved symbol. Is. Therefore, the display side MPU 162 performs display control to show from the game times related to the boy's character symbol to the game times related to the girl's character symbol as one effect.

In FIG. 80, in the upper display area Dm, an example in which a girl's character symbol is also displayed at the same time in a game related to a boy's character symbol (a production in which both the boy's character symbol and the girl's character symbol confront the enemy character symbol). However, the girl's character symbol may be displayed from the middle of the effect in which the boy's character symbol and the enemy character symbol confront each other, or after the effect in which the boy's character symbol is defeated is displayed. It may be displayed as a resurrection character.

In addition, if the winning lottery is not won in the game round related to the boy's character symbol and there is no reserved symbol that wins the winning lottery in the support zone EZ, the third replacement command is transmitted or the replacement command is not transmitted. Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the third replacement command, the display control is performed so that the character symbol of the girl is not displayed in the support zone EZ. In this way, although the character symbols of the girls are replaced, by adding a display effect such as whether or not to enter the support zone EZ, even if the character symbols of the girls are replaced, it is not confirmed that they will enter the support zone EZ. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect display by exchanging (moving) the character pattern of the girl. If the replacement command is not received, the girl's character design is displayed as it is.

If the girl's character symbol is displayed but the girl's character symbol is not displayed in the support zone EZ, as described above, the normal effect is displayed in the game times related to the girl's character symbol. Will be done. Therefore, if the girl's character symbol is not displayed as the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ after being replaced with the reserved non-notified symbol, the boy's character symbol confronts the enemy character symbol. It may be changed to the hold non-notification symbol and displayed before or after the effect. Further, the display side MPU 162 ends the display process of the support zone after the effect of confronting the boy's character symbol and the enemy character symbol.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, when the boy character symbol is displayed as the reserved symbol, the support zone EZ is displayed (FIGS. 78 to 80, 84, 85), and the girl character symbol is displayed in the support zone EZ. When is displayed, a hit result occurs. Therefore, when the boy's character symbol is displayed, the player first continues the game while expecting that the girl's character symbol is displayed as the reserved symbol, and the girl's character symbol is displayed. In that case, the game is continued while expecting that the character symbol of the girl is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the girl character symbol may be displayed after the boy character symbol is displayed as the reserved symbol, but even if the boy character symbol wins the lottery, it is displayed in the lottery. (FIG. 82, S2303). That is, even if only the boy's character symbol is displayed, a winning result may be obtained. Therefore, even if the girl's character symbol is not displayed, the player can pay attention to the game while expecting that a hit result will be generated in the game times related to the boy's character symbol.

Further, since the character pattern of the girl is moved (replaced) so as to produce an effect such as whether or not to enter the support zone EZ, the player's attention to the replacement (movement) of the girl can be improved.

(Modified example of the sixth embodiment)
A modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described. For example, even if the winning lottery for the boy's character symbol is missed and the winning lottery for the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ is also missed, the girl's character symbol may be replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. You may. According to this, displaying the character pattern of the girl in the support zone EZ can be regarded as one effect (so-called game chance-up effect), and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect that the boy's character symbol is defeated is displayed, and then the girl's character symbol may be displayed as a resurrected character, thereby diversifying the effect. be able to.

Further, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 82), in the third hold notification lottery process (S2303), the notification winning flag is stored in the slave hold area RC # of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b, and the second When the missed notification winning flag is not stored, and when the first missed notification winning flag is stored and the second missed notification winning flag is not stored, and the corresponding pending area RC is in the support zone EZ. When the notification non-winning flag is stored in #, the probability of winning the third hold notification lottery process may be increased. That is, when a hit result occurs in a game round related to a boy's character symbol, or when a hit result occurs in a game round related to a reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, the girl's character symbol is easily displayed. May be good. According to this, the character symbol of the girl is likely to be generated, and the player is likely to experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement with the reserved symbol of the support zone EZ. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the character symbol of the first girl (third advance notification) and the character symbol of the second girl (fourth advance notification) are displayed as the reserved symbols, and the first girl When the character symbol of the character is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ and when the character symbol of the second girl is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, the degree of expectation that a hit result will occur is changed. You may. For example, when the character symbol of the second girl is displayed on the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, the expectation that a hit result will occur is higher than when the character symbol of the first girl is displayed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), since two reserved symbols are displayed in the support zone EZ, after the character symbol of the first girl is replaced with one reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, the first symbol is displayed. The character symbol of the girl 2 may be replaced with the other reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), the character symbol of the first girl and the character symbol of the second girl confront each other in the support zone EZ (pre-special effect). Is displayed so that the winning character symbol and the boy's character symbol and the enemy character symbol are confronted with each other, and the expected degree of winning result may be different depending on the winning character symbol. According to this, the player can further pay attention to the reserved symbol display area Ds *.

After the production in which the character symbol of the first girl and the character symbol of the second girl confront each other, the character symbol of the defeated girl may be displayed as it is, or may be changed to a hold non-notification symbol. May be good. When displaying the character symbol of the first girl and the character symbol of the second girl, the character symbol of the first girl (character symbol with low expectation) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *. After that, it is preferable that the character symbol of the second girl (character symbol with high expectation) is displayed. According to this, when the boy's character symbol is displayed, even if the first girl's character symbol is displayed, the player has a higher expectation that the second girl's character will be a hit result. Since the game is continued with the expectation that the symbol will be displayed, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

Further, the operation valid lottery process (S2007) is performed in the same manner as in the first to fifth embodiments, and the replacement process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26 or after the operation valid period has elapsed. It may be.

Further, the effect content may be changed according to the distance (positional relationship) between the boy's character symbol and the girl's character symbol without setting the support zone EZ.

(7th Embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since this embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 43 is changed with respect to each of the above-described embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 43 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 63 is not provided in the upper opening of the distribution winning device 62.
Further, the normal symbol start gate 57 is provided on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43. A second starting port 55-2 is provided on the right side of the distribution winning device 62 when viewed from the front, and an electric accessory 63 is provided at the second starting port 55-2.

In such a game machine, it is advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 and open the electric accessory 63 in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode). The game ball is launched so that the game ball passes on the right side of the symbol display device 80 (so-called right-handed hit). As a result, the player can continue the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. That is, in the present embodiment, the player can maintain the firing state (right-handed) as it is after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

The present invention is also applied to the pachinko machine 10 using such a game board 43.

By the way, in the above-mentioned game machine, in the high probability mode, since the player strikes right, it is difficult for the game ball to win the distribution winning device 66 (the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55-1). Therefore, in such a game machine, when shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the player stops launching the game ball when the reserved symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed. The tendency to watch over the game becomes particularly strong (see the fourth embodiment above).

However, by providing the configuration of the fourth embodiment, that is, when both the reserved symbol in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol in the low probability mode are displayed, the hold notification symbol may be displayed in the low probability mode. By making it so that the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode and the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode may be displayed interchangeably, the hold symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed. Immediately after the game is played, the player can be prompted to launch the game ball so that the game ball wins the distribution winning device 66 (first starting port 54 and second starting port 55-1). That is, even immediately after the reserved symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed, the player can easily continue the game, and the player's willingness to play can be promoted.

(Modified example of the seventh embodiment)
A modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. For example, the game board 43 of the seventh embodiment may not be provided with the distribution winning device 63 and may not be provided with the second starting port 55-1. That is, in the low-probability mode, the game ball may be easily won only in the first starting port 54, and in the high-probability mode, the game ball may be easily won in the second starting port 55-2. In other words, in the low probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 may be a pachinko machine 10 in which the winning of the game balls does not occur alternately at the first and second starting ports 54 and 55. That is, in the first, second, fourth to sixth embodiments, the winning of the game ball does not occur alternately at the first and second starting ports 54 and 55, and the low probability mode and the high probability mode are used. The pachinko machine 10 may have different easiness of winning a game ball to the first and second starting ports 54 and 55.

In the case of such a pachinko machine 10, for example, in the lower display area Ds of the symbol display device 80, the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game is displayed on the left side of the front view, and the second symbol on the right side of the front view is displayed. The reserved symbol related to the lottery game may be displayed. That is, by changing the place where the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game are displayed, the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game can be easily distinguished. It may be.

Further, in the case of such a pachinko machine 10, the second lottery game (holding information triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 55-2) is triggered by the first lottery game (winning in the first starting port 54). The winning / failing lottery or the like may be prioritized (executed) over the pending information). That is, in the high probability mode, even if the game ball is won in the first starting port 54, if the game ball is won in the second starting port 55-2, the second starting port 55 is said. The winning / losing lottery or the like triggered by the game ball may be preferentially digested.

In such a game machine, for example, in the first and second embodiments, in the high probability mode, the second lottery game is preferentially executed, so that the reserved symbols related to the second lottery game are easily exchanged with each other. .. That is, the reserved symbols having a high probability of resulting in a 16R probability variation hit result, which is advantageous for the player, are easily exchanged with each other. For this reason, it is unlikely that the player will be less likely to have a 16R probability variation hit result due to the replacement of the hold notification symbol (for example, "●") and the hold non-notification symbol (for example, "○"). As a result, the player can enjoy the effect that the hold notification symbols are replaced.

Further, by appropriately adjusting the arrangement positions of the nails, the windmills, and the like provided on the game board 43, when the player makes a so-called right-handed hit in the high probability mode, a small number of game balls are inserted into the first starting port 54. You may be guided to. Then, the hold notification symbol (for example, "●") is displayed for the first lottery game that is not preferentially digested, and the hold non-notification symbol (for example, "○") for the second lottery game in which the hold notification symbol is preferentially digested. It may be replaced with "). According to this, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the reserved symbol of the lottery game that is preferentially digested and the reserved symbol of the lottery game that is not preferentially digested are exchanged.

(Other embodiments)
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Then, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. In addition, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied to an embodiment different from the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(A) Display mode of the symbol display device 80 (1) First example of replacement of reserved symbols In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. Three types of reserved symbols "○", "△", and "●" are displayed at random, and when at least three types of these reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols are replaced to make a predetermined combination. As a result, the display side MPU 162 (expectation degree notification control means) may display the degree of expectation at which a hit result such as "reach" or "celebration (hit)" occurs. The three types of reserved symbols "○", "△", and "●" have the same degree of expectation as a winning result.

That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 89A, three reserved symbols “◯” are displayed. Therefore, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, "Operate the second frame button, arrange three" ○ ", and press the first frame button! !! Is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the second frame button 27 is a substantially cross key, the player can move the cursor key by operating the left and right keys, and the up and down keys. The reserved symbol can be selected by operating, and the selected reserved symbol can be exchanged by repeating this operation twice and selecting two reserved symbols.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the reserved symbols "○" are replaced so as to be displayed side by side in the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4, and then the first frame is displayed by the player. When the button 26 is operated, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the effect that the reserved symbol is bursting is displayed in the 2nd to 4th reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4, and the game times related to the burst reserved symbol. Make sure that the characters that suggest the contents of are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), when there is a game time related to the reserved symbols displayed in the 2nd to 4th reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4, the reach lottery is won. In the center of the screen of the upper display area Dm, a display such as "reach" is displayed, and if there is a winning lottery, a character such as "celebration" is displayed, and then in the upper left part of the front view of the upper display area Dm. Move characters such as "reach" and "celebration" so that they are displayed. Then, in the game round related to the reserved symbol that triggered the display of "reach" or "celebration", the effect using the characters such as "reach" or "celebration" is displayed.

According to this, the condition that the expected degree (characters such as reach and congratulation) of the game times related to the reserved symbols is displayed is satisfied by rearranging the reserved symbols into a predetermined combination, so that the reserved symbols are the intention of the player. The player cannot know the expected degree of the game times regarding the reserved symbol unless it is replaced accordingly. For this reason, the player can actively participate in a new game (directing) of solving a mystery (replacement) at his / her own will, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since a new game of solving a mystery is given, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the state of FIG. 89A, the characters displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80 can be changed as appropriate. For example, "Three" ◯ "are arranged within three times and the first one is arranged. Press the frame button! !! , "Arrange 3" ○ "and arrange 2 reserved symbols" △ "and press the 1st frame button! !! It is possible to display such as ", etc., and it is preferable that the display corresponds to the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 may not be three types, may be two types, or may be four or more types. Then, a difference may be provided in the expected degree of the winning result in the displayed reserved symbols. In other words, when a winning result is obtained in the corresponding game round, the reserved symbol with a high expectation that a winning result will occur is displayed, and the same reserved symbol as the reserved symbol is likely to appear in the subsequent reserved symbol. It may be.

(2) Second example of replacement of reserved symbols When the symbol display device 80 is used to display an effect based on music (musical music), the reserved symbols are "do", "re", "mi", and "fa". "So""La""Shi""Do" may be displayed one by one at random. Then, when all eight reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols may be replaced.

That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 90 (a), "do", "re", "mi", "fa", "so", "la", "shi", and "do" are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. "Is displayed one by one at random. Therefore, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, "operate the second frame button to switch in the order of" do "" re "" mi "" fa "" so "" la "" shi "" do ". After that, press the 1st frame button! !! Is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, as described in (1) above, the reserved symbols can be replaced by operating the second frame button 27.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), "do", "re", "mi", "fa", "so", "la", "shi", and "shi" in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. When the first frame button 26 is operated by the player in a state where the reserved symbols are exchanged so that "do" is displayed in order, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas are displayed as shown in FIG. 90 (c). The effect that the reserved symbol is bursting is displayed in Ds1 to Ds8, and as shown in FIG. 90 (d), characters such as "reach" and "celebration" explained in (1) are displayed. To do.

According to this, since the replacement operation can be performed after the reserved symbols are displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the player holds the reserved symbols in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The game is continued to display the symbol. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

(3) Third example of replacement of reserved symbols When the symbol display device 80 is used to display a mahjong-themed effect, "east", "south", "west", and "north" are randomly selected as reserved symbols. It may be displayed two by two.
That is, when all the reserved symbols are displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, "East", "South", "West", and "North" are displayed in the order of two. You may.
Then, when all eight reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols may be replaced.

That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 91 (a), two "east", "south", "west", and "north" are randomly displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. ing. Therefore, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, "operate the second frame button to make four toys of" east "," south "," west ", and" north "and press the first frame button! !! Is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, as described in (1) above, the reserved symbols can be replaced by operating the second frame button 27.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the first and second reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2 are "east", and the third and fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds3 and Ds4 are "south", fifth, A state in which the reserved symbols are replaced so that "west" is displayed in the 6th reserved symbol display areas Ds5 and Ds6 and "north" is displayed in the 7th and 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds7 and Ds8, and a predetermined combination is created. When the first frame button 26 is operated by the player in, the effect that the reserved symbols are bursting is displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 as shown in FIG. 91 (c). Display the degree of expectation for the winning result regarding the ruptured reserved symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), as the degree of expectation for the winning result of the game round regarding the reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, "white" and "發" One of "medium" (for example, white has the lowest hit expectation and medium has the highest hit expectation) may be displayed (in FIG. 91 (d), "medium" is displayed. There is).

According to this, the player continues the game in an attempt to display the reserved symbols in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when the symbol display device 80 is used to display a mahjong-themed effect, "east", "south", "west", "north", "white", "發", and "middle" are randomly selected as reserved symbols. It may be displayed one by one. That is, when all the reserved symbols are displayed in the 1st to 7th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds7, the order of "east", "south", "west", "north", "white", "發", and "middle" is different. It may be displayed one by one. Then, when all seven reserved symbols are displayed, for example, if the reserved symbols are replaced in the order of "east", "south", "west", "north", "white", "發", and "middle", FIG. 89 (d) Or, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), characters such as "reach" and "celebration" may be displayed.

(4) Example of replacement of other reserved symbols In addition to the above (1) to (3), if the reserved symbols in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are exchanged to obtain a predetermined combination. , The reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to D8 may be any. For example, numbers, characters, symbols, characters, etc. may be displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, and the combination contents can be changed as appropriate. In this case, by assuming that the reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are related to the subject of the effect display on the symbol display device 80, the player's interest in the game is further increased. Can be improved.

(B) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which "100" is set in the high-probability game count counter in step 1202 of the special electric power termination process (FIG. 29) has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be "50" or "120". Further, the number of times to set may be changed according to the hit result. For example, in the case of the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, and the 16RRU probability variation hit result, "100" is set, and in the case of the 8RRU probability variation hit result and the 4RRU probability variation hit result, "50" is set. May be good.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, a configuration may not include a RU probability variation hit result, or a configuration may include only a RU probability variation hit result. Further, although the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may be configured to have a winning result in which the low-probability support mode remains.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. The configuration may not be included in the winning numerical information in the probability mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, even if the type of winning result to be distributed is different depending on whether the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Good.

(5) In the first, second, fourth to seventh embodiments, the type of the winning result by the distribution lottery regarding the first starting port 54 and the type of the winning result by the distribution lottery regarding the second starting port 55. May be a configuration in which is exactly the same. According to this, the confirmation process for the hold notice (FIG. 30, FIG. 31, etc.) can be a common process.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration of granting the game ball to the variable winning device 56 or the like for winning the game ball is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, and the function of storing the virtual game medium. In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the reserved symbols are displayed interchangeably, the reserved symbol display area Ds * as the replacement source and the reserved symbol display area Ds * as the replacement destination are blinked, for example. Or you may change the background color. According to this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved symbols have been replaced, and can enjoy the game while increasing the expectation for the game times regarding the replaced reserved symbols.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, a normal hit result and a probabilistic hit result may be provided. That is, the transition between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the winning / failing lottery mode may be performed when the probability variation hit result or the normal hit result occurs.

In this case, in the case of the configuration including the normal hit result and the probability variation hit result in the fourth embodiment, for example, after the probability variation hit result and the normal hit result are generated, the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) is provided. ) To shift to the high frequency support mode. Then, as in the fourth embodiment, in the low frequency support mode (second game mode), at least "●" is displayed as a reserved symbol in which reach fluctuation occurs, and the high frequency support mode (first game). In mode), at least when the reserved symbol "●" whose reach fluctuation is confirmed is displayed, the winning result is always generated in the game times related to the reserved symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to impart gametability that the reserved symbols beyond the boundary of the mode may be replaced, as in the fourth embodiment.

(9) In the first to third, fifth, and seventh embodiments, the hit type can also be determined in the slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b. When the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, the 16R probability variation hit result or the 16RRU probability variation hit result may be fixed. According to this, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, even if the hold notification symbol related to the second lottery game is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol related to the first lottery game, the 16R probability variation hit result is generated in the game times related to the replaced hold notification symbol. Therefore, the game can be continued while expecting that the replacement process will occur for any of the reserved symbols related to the first and second lottery games.

Further, when the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, one of the RU probability variation hit results may be determined. According to this, in each of the above embodiments, the ratios of the 16RRU probability variation hit result, the 8RRU probability variation hit result, and the 4RRU probability variation hit result to the winning of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 are equal (see FIG. 16). Even if the hold notification symbol is replaced with either the hold non-notification symbol related to the first lottery game or the hold non-notification symbol related to the second lottery game, there is no high probability that one of them will have a particularly advantageous result for the player. Therefore, the player can continue the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol.

Further, also in the fourth embodiment, when the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode (the hold symbol that won the winning lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery) and the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode are exchanged. , 16R Probability variation hit result may be fixed. For the player, when the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed at the same time, any winning result (for example, 4R probability variation winning result) Even so, there is a high interest in determining the winning result, so if there is a winning non-notifying symbol in the high probability mode that has won the lottery, the probability is low regardless of the type of winning result. It is preferable to replace the hold notification symbol in the mode.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, in the slave first to slave eighth hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, the hit type can also be determined, and if the confrontation effect is won, 16R The probability variation hit result or the 16RRU probability variation hit result may be fixed. According to this, if the confrontation effect is won, the 16R probability variation hit result or the 16RRU probability variation hit result is determined, so that the player pays more attention to the confrontation effect and displays the character pattern of the girl before the confrontation effect. Since the game is continued in order to make it, the interest in the game can be further improved.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding notice) related to the first and second lottery games are not displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, but are displayed as symbols. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device provided separately from the device 80, or the hold notice is given by setting the movable decorative member in a predetermined notice mode. It may be configured that the hold notice is given by turning on the lamp (predetermined light emitting unit), or the hold notice may be given by the output of the sound from the speaker unit 34. The hold notice may be given by a combination of all or a part of the above.

For example, when a hold notice is given by a lamp, in the first to fourth and seventh embodiments, the lamp is turned on as a display mode corresponding to the hold non-notification symbol, and the lamp is turned on as a display mode corresponding to the hold notification symbol. It may be configured to blink. Further, in the fifth embodiment, for example, the lamp is turned on as a display mode corresponding to the hold non-notification symbol, the lamp is blinked at a low speed as the display mode corresponding to the first hold notification symbol, and the second hold notification symbol is supported. The display mode may be such that the lamp blinks at high speed. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the lamp is turned on as a display mode corresponding to the hold non-notification symbol, the lamp is blinked at a low speed as a display mode corresponding to the first hold notification symbol, and the display corresponding to the second hold notification symbol is displayed. As an embodiment, the lamp may be blinked at high speed, and the emission color may be different between the hold display displayed in the support zone EZ and the support zone EZ and the other hold display.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with only the adjacent hold non-notification symbol (the previous hold non-notification symbol and the next hold non-notification symbol). According to this, when the hold notification symbol is displayed, the player can easily identify the hold non-notification symbol in which the hold notification symbol is replaced, so that it becomes easier to understand the area of interest and the game is played without causing confusion. You can pay attention to. It should be noted that the fact that the hold notification symbol here is replaced with the adjacent hold non-notification symbol means that, as described with reference to FIG. 55 above, the hold notification symbol is replaced with the adjacent hold non-notification symbol multiple times. There may be.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold information is acquired with the winning of the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 as a trigger, the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 related to the hold information and the information The hold command including the value information of the hit type counter C2 is transmitted from the main control device 91 to the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93, and the voice lamp is used as a destination identification means such as confirmation processing for holding notice. It may be included in the control device 92 or the display control device 93.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. Further, the functions of the voice lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91, and the functions of both the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91. It may be configured as a new type. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 does not control the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91. It may be configured to control the control device 92.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 93 may execute the reserved symbol replacement process instead of the voice lamp control device 92 executing the reserved symbol replacement process.

(15) In the first to fourth and seventh embodiments, the symbol display device 80 may not be provided, and the lottery result such as the winning / losing lottery may be taught by the movable decorative member.

(16) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, etc.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.
In addition, the game machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

In addition, for example, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, it is possible to acquire a symbol corresponding to a reserved symbol when a medal is inserted, a reel rotation is started, a reel is stopped, or the like. By replacing the acquired symbols, it is possible to provide new playability and diversify the game. In this case, as the symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols, basically different symbols may be displayed alternately as in the third embodiment, and some lottery probability may be obtained for the alternately displayed symbols. May be different.

(17) Each of the above embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, the third embodiment may be combined with the fourth to seventh embodiments so that the player can distinguish between the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game. Further, in the first to fifth and seventh embodiments, as in the sixth embodiment, the lower display area Ds may be provided with the execution pending symbol display area Ds0 (see FIG. 78 and the like). In addition, the player's interest in the game may be improved by appropriately combining them or by further combining the combinations.

(C) Invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments The characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

(0) Feature M Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state is set. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Further, when the lottery result is a transition to the so-called winning game state, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed. The payout of game balls is executed according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is displaying a variable pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is a pachinko game machine that is supposed to be (held memory). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (for example). JP-A-2004-81853).

In such a game machine, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention of the player to the game, and the feature M group solves the problem.

Feature M0. A progress control means (MPU 11 of the main control device 91) that controls the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress process (timer interrupt process in each of the above embodiments).
An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value greater than 1, and
The grant determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information is executed, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In some cases, the grant determination means (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the plurality of the special information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game (for example, a long-time mode). A privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 56 in
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquisition information storage means is stored in the information corresponding to the determination result when the grant determination is the target, or in the acquisition information storage means. Destination specifying means (main control) that specifies information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in MPU 112 of device 91) and
At a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the prior identification means becomes the target of the grant determination, the advance notification that reflects the specific result by the prior identification means is notified by the notification means (symbol display device 80). ) Is provided with advance notification control means (a function of executing the hold command corresponding process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying the hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
The advance notification control means
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the advance notification distribution means (voice lamp) that selects either the first advance notification or the second advance notification different from the first first notification for the advance notification that reflects the specific result. The function of executing the processing of S2203, S2302, and S2303 in the MPU 152 of the control device 92) and
In the case where the first first notification and the second first notification are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first first notification and the second first notification are replaced with each other. A gaming machine characterized by having a pre-notification replacement means (a function of executing processing of S2203, S2302, S2303 in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for executing a replacement process for causing the notification means to notify.

According to the feature M0, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. Is notified by the notification means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order to be the target of the grant judgment is the target of the later special information is first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved. Further, when the first first notification and the second first notification are notified by the notification means, there is a possibility that the first first notification and the second first notification are exchanged and notified, which is a new game property. Can be provided. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Features M1. The gaming machine according to feature M0, wherein the second first notification is a first notification that causes the player to recognize that the special information has a higher probability of corresponding to the hit / miss information group than the first first notification.

According to the feature M1, in the second first notification, the probability that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group (probability that a hit result is generated) is higher than that in the first first notification, so that the player generates the second first notification. You can continue the game while expecting to do it. Then, when the second first notification occurs, it is possible to provide a new game property that the second first notification may be replaced with another first first notification and notified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Feature M2. When the first advance notification and the second advance notification are exchanged, the advance notification replacement means states that the predetermined special information specified by the advance identification means corresponds to the pass / fail information group. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the specified first first notification and the second first notification are exchanged with each other.

Feature M3. When the predetermined special information specified by the prior identification means is specified to correspond to the pass / fail information group, the predetermined special information is used as hit information, and the specific target is specified by the prior identification means. When it is specified that the predetermined special information that has become
The advance notification replacement means determines that there is a notification that reflects the hit information as the first first notification, and that there is a notification that reflects the deviation information as the second first notification, and predetermined conditions The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein when the above-mentioned is established, the first first notification that reflects the hit information and the second first notification that reflects the deviation information are exchanged and notified to the notification means. ..

According to the features M2 and M3, when the second first notification is replaced with the first first notification, the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant determination corresponding to the replaced second first notification. Judge that there is. That is, in the variable display times (game times) related to the replaced second destination notification, the player is given a privilege game. Therefore, the player first continues the game while expecting the second first notification to occur, and when the second first notification occurs, the player expects that the second first notification will be replaced. Pay attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Features M4. The advance notification replacement means determines that only the notification that reflects the deviation information exists as the first first notification and that the notification that reflects the deviation information exists as the second first notification, and predetermined conditions The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein when the above-mentioned is established, the first first notification that reflects the deviation information and the second first notification that reflects the deviation information are exchanged and notified to the notification means. ..

According to the feature M4, even if the second first notification is replaced with the first first notification, it may not be determined that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant determination regarding the second first notification. There is. That is, the privileged game is not always given to the player in the variable display times related to the replaced second destination notification. For this reason, it is possible to regard the fact that the first first notification and the second first notification are exchanged and notified as one effect in the game (so-called game chance-up effect), and it is possible to diversify the game. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Feature M5. The second advance notification includes a second lower advance notification and a second upper advance notification that causes the player to recognize that the special information has a higher probability of corresponding to the hit / miss information group than the second lower advance notification. The gaming machine according to feature M3 or M4, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the second lower advance notification and the second upper advance notification may be replaced with the first first notification and notified. Further, even if the second upper-ranked advance notification having the highest probability that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group is notified, the second upper-ranked advance notification is also replaced with the first first-first notification and notified. , The player can always pay attention to the game. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Feature M6. In the advance notification replacement means, there is a notification that reflects the hit information as the first first notification, and the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination that reflect the deviation information in addition to the first first notification. When it is determined that the notification exists and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first notification that reflects the hit information and the second lower notification or the second upper notification that reflects the deviation information. The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein one of them is replaced and the notification means is notified.

According to the feature M6, the player's interest in the game without losing the significance of both the second lower notification and the second upper first notification, in which the probability that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is higher than that of the first first notification. Can be improved.

Here, a problem will be described when the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination notification are notified by the notification means.

As the second first notification, the second lower first notification and the second upper first notification that causes the player to recognize that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is higher than the second lower first notification by the notification means. In the game machine to be notified, both the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination notification may be notified (simultaneously) by the notification means. In this case, in general, when a plurality of first destination notifications are notified between the second upper destination notification and the second lower destination notification, the player generally performs the variation display times related to the second lower destination notification. However, they tend to watch the game results with some expectation. However, in general, when the second upper destination notification is notified by the notification means immediately after the second lower destination notification, the player tends to lose interest in the variable display times related to the second lower destination notification. , There is a tendency to want to shift to the variable display times related to the second upper-ranking notification as soon as possible. Therefore, in such a game machine, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully enjoy the interest in the second lower advance notification and the second upper advance notification.

It is conceivable that the gaming machine does not display the second lower advance notification and the second upper advance notification at the same time, but after one second lower advance notification (for example, the second lower advance notification) is notified, the other If the second advance notification (for example, the second upper advance notification) is not notified, the significance of adding a game in which the player is made to confirm or predict the content of the advance notification by performing the advance notification is diminished. ..

On the other hand, according to the feature M6, even when the second lower-order notification is replaced with the first first notification, the second lower-order notification is given by providing the configuration such as the feature M2. In the determination, it is determined that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the second lower prior notification without losing the interest in the second lower prior notification, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature M7. In the advance notification replacement means, there is a notification that reflects the hit information as the first first notification, and the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination that reflect the deviation information in addition to the first first notification. When it is determined that the notification exists and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first notification means that reflects the hit information and the second lower destination notification that reflects the deviation information are replaced with each other. The probability of notifying is set higher than the probability of notifying the notifying means by exchanging the first first notification that reflects the hit information and the second higher first notification that reflects the deviation information. The gaming machine according to the feature M6.

According to the feature M7, when the first first notification that reflects the hit information and the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination notification that reflect the loss information are notified by the notification means, the second lower destination The notification is replaced with the first first notification to facilitate notification. Therefore, the player can easily experience the game (directing) in which the second lower-order notification is replaced with the first first notification and is notified. Therefore, the player can be further focused on the second lower advance notification.

Feature M8. When the second lower advance notification and the second upper advance notification are notified to the notification means, the first notification replacement means performs the second lower advance notification and the second lower advance notification when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features M5 to M7, characterized in that the notification means is notified by replacing the higher-level advance notification.

According to the feature M8, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the second lower advance notification and the second upper advance notification may be exchanged and notified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Feature M9. When the advance notification distribution means determines that the first advance notification that reflects the hit information exists and the second advance notification does not exist, the advance notification that reflects the next deviation information is the first notification. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M3 to M8, wherein the probability of selecting the second first notification is higher than when the second first notification is present.

According to the feature M9, when the first first notification that reflects the hit information exists, the second first notification is likely to occur. Therefore, the player can easily experience the game (directing) in which the first first notification and the second first notification are exchanged and notified. Further, in the variable display times related to the exchanged second destination notification, the player is given a privilege game, so that the player is excited (expectation) by exchanging the first destination notification and the second destination notification. It becomes easier to experience. Therefore, the player can be further focused on the game.

Feature M10. The advance notification replacement means is any one of the features M1 to M9, characterized in that the notification means causes the notification means to replace or repeatedly replace the prior notifications that are continuous in the order of notification. The game machine described in.

According to the feature M10, continuous replacement of the prior notifications occurs in the order of notification. Therefore, the player can easily grasp which advance notification is replaced, and can suppress confusion due to the replacement of the prior notification. In addition, when the replacement of the advance notification is repeated, the player can be given a game of predicting where the notification will be finally made (whether to stop), and the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

Features M11. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
An operation valid period determining means (a function of executing the operation valid lottery process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the operation valid period of the operating means, and
An operation notification means (a function of executing an operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for performing an operation notification by the notification means after determining the operation validity period is provided.
When it is determined that the operation means is operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determining means, the advance notification replacement means is said to be one of the predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to any one of features M0 to M10, wherein the notifications are exchanged with each other to notify the notification means.

According to the feature M11, the operation notification for causing the player to operate the operation means is performed, and the advance notifications are exchanged with each other on condition that the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the operation notification is generated. Then, when an operation notification occurs, the advance notifications are exchanged by the player operating the operating means, so that the player can add a game of operating the operating means to diversify the game. Can be done. Further, the player can choose not to operate the operating means when he / she does not want to generate the replacement effect in which the advance notifications are exchanged with each other, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Feature M12. When it is determined that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, the advance notification replacement means is said to be said. The gaming machine according to feature M11, wherein the advance notifications are exchanged with each other to notify the notification means after the operation valid period has elapsed.

According to the feature M12, even if the player cannot operate the operating means for some reason, the prior notifications are exchanged with each other after the operation valid period elapses after the operation notification is given.
Therefore, for example, when the second first notification is generated because there is the first first notification that reflects the hit information as in the feature M9, it is possible to suppress the loss of the significance of the second first notification. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort in the production.

Feature M13. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start opening 54) and a second start entry portion (second start opening 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided. Prepare,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry portion, and obtains the special information when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion. Acquired,
In the grant determination means, in addition to the grant determination, when the result of the grant determination in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the grant correspondence result, the special information is the second starting ball entry unit. When the ball is acquired when the ball enters the ball, it is more advantageous for the player than when the special information is acquired when the ball enters the first starting ball entry section. Make a distribution judgment with a high probability of selecting a privilege game,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M0 to M12, wherein the privilege granting means grants the privilege game to a player based on the result of the grant determination and the result of the distribution determination.

According to the feature M13, since the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section are provided, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased. Further, in this game machine, when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section, a privilege game that is more advantageous to the player is given than when the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. It's easier. Therefore, when the feature M1 or the like is provided, if the advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion is the second advance notification, the special information is the pass / fail information group. Despite the increased probability of responding to, the player may be discouraged and lose interest in the game.

However, since the configuration of the above feature M0 is provided, the second first notification is replaced with the first first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, even if the advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion is the second advance notification, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the second advance notification. it can.

Feature M14. When the advance notification is selected, the advance notification distribution means is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start entry portion, and the game ball enters the first start entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature M13, wherein the probability of selecting the second advance notification is lower than that of the case where the ball has entered the ball.

According to the feature M14, the first advance notification is easily selected as the advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion. For this reason, the second advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section and the first advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section. Is more likely to be replaced, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the first advance notification.

Feature M15. The game area is characterized by being provided with a game ball guidance unit (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering a game ball into the first start ball entry unit and the second start ball entry unit. Features The gaming machine according to M13 or M14.

According to the feature M15, the player can easily allow the game ball to alternately enter the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry portion by letting the game ball flow down into the game area. Therefore, special information can be efficiently acquired, and many grant determinations can be executed.

Features M16. The game area has an entry port through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The game ball guiding unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction opposite to the first direction. In addition to guiding the game ball to the first starting ball entry portion, the game ball entered from the entry port is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to feature M15, characterized in that the gaming ball is guided to the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the feature M16, the game balls can be alternately distributed and guided to the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry portion by using a common member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts as compared with the case where the members for distributing the game balls are provided in the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section, respectively.

Feature M17. The game ball guiding portion is in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entered game ball and is predetermined in the second direction. The first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and the game ball that has entered the ball are in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive portion (accommodating portion 64b) that receives and rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive portion rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance. Prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive portion rotates in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance. The gaming machine according to feature M16, characterized in that the second passive portion has rotation regulating means (magnet 64c, base side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the game machine M17, since the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate due to having the rotation regulating means, the game ball then enters the ball entrance. Rotation is suppressed before the ball. That is, it is possible to suppress rotation without receiving the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently and alternately enter the game ball into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section.

Feature M18. The advance notification control means is triggered by the advance notification when the game ball enters the first start entry portion and the advance notification when the game ball enters the second start entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features M13 to M17, characterized in that the advance notification is notified to the notification means as a different notification mode.

According to the feature M18, whether the first advance notification notified by the notification means is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry section, or the second starting ball entry section. It becomes easy for the player to grasp whether or not the game ball is triggered by the entry of the ball. Therefore, when the configuration of the feature M1 is provided, there is a high possibility that the player will be discouraged if the notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry portion is the second first notification. However, since the second first notification may be replaced with the first first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section, the first start entry section may be notified. Even if the first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball is the second first notification, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the second first notification.

(1) Feature A group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state is set. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is a transition to the so-called winning game state, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed. The payout of game balls is executed according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is displaying a variable pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is a pachinko game machine that is supposed to be (held memory). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (for example). JP-A-2004-81853).

Further, in such a game machine, a first game mode (for example, a high-probability mode in which a transition to a winning game state is easy to win) and a second game mode different from the first game mode (for example, a high-probability mode for shifting to a winning game state) Some are equipped with a low-probability mode that makes it more difficult to win (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255733).

In such a game machine, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention of the player to the game, and in particular, the degree of attention to the player's game when the mode is switched between the first game mode and the second game mode. It is desired to increase. The feature A group solves the problem.

Features A1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that controls the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress process (timer interrupt process in each of the above embodiments).
An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value greater than 1, and
The grant determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information is executed, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In some cases, the grant determination means (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the plurality of the special information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game (for example, a long-time mode). A privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 56 in
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquisition information storage means is stored in the information corresponding to the determination result when the grant determination is the target, or in the acquisition information storage means. Destination specifying means (main control) that specifies information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in MPU 112 of device 91) and
At a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the prior identification means becomes the target of the grant determination, the advance notification that reflects the specific result by the prior identification means is notified by the notification means (symbol display device 80). ) Is provided with advance notification control means (a function of executing the hold command corresponding process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying the hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
The advance notification control means sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) grant determination from a predetermined reference timing (for example, open / close execution mode) as the first game mode (for example, high probability mode or high frequency support mode). When the grant determination when not in the first game mode is set to the second game mode (for example, low probability mode or low frequency support mode), the specific result is reflected in the first game mode and the second game mode. With the advance notification distribution means (a function of executing the processing of S2203 and S2302 in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that selects one of the first advance notification and the second advance notification different from the first advance notification. ,
When both the advance notification in the first game mode and the advance notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, one of the first game mode and the second game mode is used. When it is determined that the first advance notification is present in the advance notification and the second advance notification is present in the advance notification of the other game mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the said The first notification replacement means (replacement processing of the voice lamp control device 92) that performs a replacement process of switching the first first notification in one game mode and the second first notification in the other game mode to notify the notification means. A game machine characterized by having (a function of executing) and.

According to the feature A1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. Is notified by the notification means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order to be the target of the grant judgment is the target of the later special information is first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Further, when the first advance notification exists in the advance notification of one of the first game modes or the second game modes, and the second advance notification exists in the advance notification of the other game mode, the second advance notification exists. , It is possible to provide a new game property in which the first first notification and the second first notification are switched beyond the boundary of the game modes of the first game mode and the second game mode. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature A2. The pass / fail information group in the given information includes the first pass / fail information group (low-probability pass / fail information group (FIG. 15A)) and the second that corresponds to the special information in a larger number than the first pass / fail information group. A hit / fail information group (high-probability hit / miss information group (FIG. 15B)) is set.
In the first game mode, the prior identification means identifies the determination result of the grant determination based on the second hit / miss information group, and in the second game mode, the result of the grant determination is assigned to the first hit / fail information group. Identify based on
The advance notification distribution means has the first advance notification and the second game mode of the first game mode in which it is determined that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group when the grant determination is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the notification means is notified by replacing the second notification of the above.

Feature A3. When the predetermined special information specified by the prior identification means is specified to correspond to the pass / fail information group, the predetermined special information is used as hit information, and the specific target is specified by the prior identification means. When it is specified that the predetermined special information that has become
In the first game mode, the advance notification distribution means selects the first advance notification or the second advance notification as the advance notification that reflects the hit information, and as the advance notification that reflects the deviation information. The first first notification is selected, and in the second game mode, the first first notification or the second first notification is selected as the first notification.
The advance notification replacement means has a notification that reflects the hit information as the first advance notification in the first game mode, and a notification that reflects the deviation information as the second advance notification in the second game mode. When it is determined that is present and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first first notification that reflects the hit information and the second first notification that reflects the deviation information are exchanged and notified to the notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that.

According to the features A2 and A3, in the first game mode, when the second first notification is notified, it is determined that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group in the grant determination regarding the second first notification. That is, in the first game mode, a privilege game is given to the player in the variable display time (game time) related to the second destination notification. Therefore, even if all the advance notifications for the specified number of times in the first game mode are notified, the player first, if all the advance notifications in the first game mode are the first first notifications, first, the second game mode. The game is continued while expecting the second advance notification to occur in. That is, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the game beyond the mode. Then, when the second first notification occurs in the second game mode, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the second first notification is replaced with the first first notification in the first game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when both the advance notification in the first game mode and the advance notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, as the advance notification in the second game mode, if it is the first game mode, the player is notified. Since it is possible to notify the second destination notification to which the privileged game is given, it is possible to diversify the game.

That is, when the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are exchanged so as not to be notified, that is, in the conventional game machine, the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode When both the advance notification and the advance notification are notified by the notification means, the player is notified of the second advance notification to which the privilege game is given in the first game mode as the advance notification regarding the second game mode. Not only will you lose expectations about the second notification, but you may also feel disgusted. Therefore, in the conventional game machine, when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, so-called prohibition processing is executed, and the second There is one in which the advance notification of the game mode is always the first advance notification.

However, in such a pachinko machine, the advance notification (directing) when shifting from the first game mode to the second game mode is always the first advance notification, and the player can change from the first game mode to the second game mode. There is a possibility that you will get bored early while not paying attention to the production when shifting to the game mode.

On the other hand, as in the features A2 and A3, the first advance notification in the first game mode and the second advance notification in the second game mode may be interchanged, so that the prohibition processing is performed in the second game mode. It is not necessary to execute the above, and it is possible to diversify the effect (advance notification) when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are displayed. Further, when both the first notification of the first game mode and the first notification of the second game mode are displayed, and the second first notification is notified as the first notification of the second game mode, the second destination is concerned. By replacing the notification with the first first notification in the first game mode, the player is given a privilege game in the variable display times related to the second first notification. Therefore, by notifying the second advance notification as the advance notification of the second game mode, the player can have great expectations and the motivation to promote the game can be improved. ..

Feature A4. The advance notification distribution means is the advance notification of the first game mode when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means. When it is determined that the first advance notification that reflects the hit information does not exist in the first notification and the second advance notification that reflects the deviation information does not exist in the advance notification in the second game mode. When selecting the next advance notification in the second game mode, the probability of selecting the second advance notification is higher than when the second advance notification is included in the advance notification in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature A4, when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, the hit information is reflected in the advance notification of the first game mode. When the first advance notification exists, the second advance notification is likely to occur as the advance notification in the second game mode. Therefore, the player can easily experience the game (directing) in which the first first notification in the first game mode and the second first notification in the second game mode are interchanged and notified. Further, in the variable display times related to the second first notification in the replaced first game mode, the player is given a privilege game, so that the player can switch between the first first notification and the second first notification. It becomes easier to experience excitement (expectation). Therefore, the player can be further focused on the game.

Feature A5. The advance notification distribution means is the advance notification of the first game mode when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means. When selecting the first advance notification, then when selecting the advance notification in the second game mode, the hit information is reflected in the first advance notification in the first game mode. When it is determined that there is something to be done, the probability of selecting the second first notification is higher than when it is determined that there is something that reflects the deviation information in the first first notification in the first game mode. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A5, when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, in the first game mode, the first advance notification is sent as the advance notification. I try to choose. That is, when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, in the first game mode, even if the advance notification reflects the hit information, the first notification is the first. 2 The advance notification is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even if all the advance notifications in the specified number of times in the first game mode are notified by the notification means, the player is allowed to continue the game while expecting the second advance notification to occur in the second game mode. it can.

Further, when the first advance notification that reflects the hit information exists in the advance notification of the first game mode, the second advance notification is likely to occur as the advance notification of the second game mode. Therefore, as in the feature A4, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the first first notification and the second first notification. Therefore, the player can be further focused on the game.

Feature A6. The advance notification control means is a advance notification distinguishing means (high of the display control device 93) that causes the notification means to notify the advance notification in the first game mode and the advance notification in the second game mode as different notification modes. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, which has a function of displaying and processing a probability mode and a low probability mode).

According to the feature A6, the player can easily grasp whether the advance notification notified by the notification means is the advance notification of the first game mode or the advance notification of the second game mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the game property of confirming the game mode. In addition, the player can continue the game while recognizing that the advance notification of the first game mode has ended and expecting that the second advance notification will be generated as the advance notification of the second game mode. You can continue the game while maintaining your interest.

Feature A7. The advance notification replacement means is any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the notification means causes the notification means to replace or repeatedly replace the prior notifications that are continuous in the order of notification. The game machine described in.

According to the feature A7, continuous replacement of the prior notifications occurs in the order of the notifications. Therefore, the player can easily grasp which advance notification is replaced, and can suppress confusion due to the replacement of the prior notification. In addition, when the replacement of the advance notification is repeated, the player can be given a game of predicting where the notification will be finally made (whether it will stop). In particular, when the configuration such as the feature A2 is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the second advance notification of the second game mode is notified as the advance notification of the first game mode. Can increase the interest of people in the game.

Feature A8. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
An operation valid period determining means (a function of executing the operation valid lottery process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the operation valid period of the operating means, and
An operation notification means (a function of executing an operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for performing an operation notification by the notification means after determining the operation validity period is provided.
When it is determined that the operation means is operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determining means as one of the predetermined conditions, the advance notification replacement means is said to be the first. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, wherein the first notification and the second first notification are exchanged and the notification means is notified.

According to the feature A8, the operation notification for causing the player to operate the operation means is performed, and the first first notification and the second first notification are interchanged on condition that the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game while paying attention to the operation notification generated when the first first notification and the second first notification occur. Then, when the operation notification occurs, the first notification and the second notification are exchanged by the player operating the operation means, so that the player can add the game of operating the operation means. It is possible to diversify the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the player may choose not to operate the operating means when he / she does not want to generate the replacement effect in which the first first notification and the second first notification are interchanged. For this reason, when the configuration such as feature A2 is provided, the player determines whether to detect that a hit is generated in advance by generating the replacement effect or to enjoy the effect without intentionally generating the replacement effect. You can choose. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Feature A9. When it is determined that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, the advance notification replacement means is said to be said. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the first notification and the second notification are exchanged with each other to notify the notification means after the operation valid period has elapsed.

According to the feature A9, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, the first first notification and the second first notification are exchanged after the operation valid period elapses after the operation notification is given. Therefore, for example, when the second first notification is generated because there is the first first notification that reflects the hit information as in the feature A4, it is possible to suppress the loss of the significance of the second first notification. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort in the production.

Feature A10. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start opening 54) and a second start entry portion (second start opening 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided. Prepare,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry portion, and obtains the special information when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, which is characterized in that it is acquired.

According to the feature A10, since at least the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are provided as the start ball entry part, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased.

Feature A11. The game area is characterized by being provided with a game ball guidance unit (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering a game ball into the first start ball entry unit and the second start ball entry unit. Features The gaming machine according to A10.

According to the feature A11, by letting the game ball flow down to the game area, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section alternately. Therefore, special information can be efficiently acquired, and many grant determinations can be executed.

Feature A12. The game area has an entry port through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The game ball guiding unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction opposite to the first direction. In addition to guiding the game ball to the first starting ball entry portion, the game ball entered from the entry port is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that the game ball is guided to the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the feature A12, the game balls can be alternately distributed and guided to the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry portion by using a common member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts as compared with the case where the members for distributing the game balls are provided in the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section, respectively.

Feature A13. The game ball guiding portion is in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entered game ball and is predetermined in the second direction. The first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and the game ball that has entered the ball are in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive portion (accommodating portion 64b) that receives and rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive portion rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance. Prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive portion rotates in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance. The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that the second passive portion has rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base side magnet 65a) for preventing the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature A13, since the first passive portion and the second passive portion receive the game ball and rotate, then the game ball enters the ball entrance. Rotation is suppressed before the movement. That is, it is possible to suppress rotation without receiving the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently and alternately enter the game ball into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section.

(2) Feature B group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state is set. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Further, when the lottery result is a transition to the so-called winning game state, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed. The payout of game balls is executed according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is displaying a variable pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is a pachinko game machine that is supposed to be (held memory). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (for example). JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, there is a device that notifies a player of information (holding information) used for a winning lottery (preliminary notification), and there is a device that further provides a plurality of notification methods. In such a game machine, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the game by further devising the method of notification, and the feature B group solves the problem.

Feature B1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that controls the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress process (timer interrupt process in each of the above embodiments).
An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value greater than 1, and
The grant determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information is executed, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In some cases, the grant determination means (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the plurality of the special information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game (for example, a long-time mode). A privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 56 in
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquisition information storage means is stored in the information corresponding to the determination result when the grant determination is the target, or in the acquisition information storage means. Destination specifying means (main control) that specifies information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in MPU 112 of device 91) and
Notification having a plurality of notification areas for advance notification that reflects the specific result by the prior identification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the prior identification means becomes the target of the grant determination. Pre-notification control means (a function of executing the hold command correspondence process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying the hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) and the means (design display device 80) With,
The advance notification control means
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the advance notification distribution means (voice lamp) that selects either the first advance notification or the second advance notification different from the first first notification for the advance notification that reflects the specific result. The function of executing the processing of S2203 and S2302 in the MPU 152 of the control device 92) and
When the second first notification is notified by the first notification means, it is a means that is executed with priority over the first notification distribution means, and the predetermined special information specified by the first identification means. The predetermined special information when it is specified that corresponds to the pass / fail information group is used as the hit information, and the predetermined special information specified by the prior identification means corresponds to the pass / fail information group. When the predetermined special information specified as not being specified is used as the deviation information, the first notification and the first and second destination notifications, which are different from the first and second destination notifications, are the first notifications that reflect the next deviation information. With a slave notification distribution means (a function of executing the processing of S2303 in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that includes three destination notifications and selects one destination notification from the destination notifications excluding the second destination notification. ,
In the case where the first notification and the third notification are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first notification and the third notification are replaced with each other. A gaming machine characterized by having a pre-notification replacement means (a function of executing the processing of S2505a, S2505b, S2510, and S2511 of the voice lamp control device 92) for executing a replacement process for causing the notification means to notify.

According to the feature B1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. Is notified by the notification means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order to be the target of the grant judgment is the target of the later special information is first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved. Further, when the third destination notification occurs, it is possible to provide a new game property that the third destination notification may be replaced with another first destination notification and notified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when the third first notification occurs, the positional relationship (notification relationship) between the second first notification and the third first notification changes by replacing the third first notification with another first first notification. Therefore, the effect can be different depending on the positional relationship between the second first notification and the third first notification, and the player can confirm or predict the positional relationship between the third first notification and the second first notification. Is added. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature B2. The slave notification distribution notification means is described in feature B1 characterized in that when the third destination notification has already been notified by the notification means, the destination notification different from the third destination notification is selected. Game machine.

According to the feature B2, when the third first notification is notified by the notification means, the third first notification is prevented from being notified in duplicate. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the advance notification (third advance notification) that the player should pay attention to, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused due to the replacement of the advance notification that the player is not paying attention to.

Feature B3. A pattern display means (design display device 80) for varyingly displaying a pattern, and
It has a display control means (display control device 93) for displaying and controlling the variation display and a predetermined effect in the pattern display means.
When the pattern display means starts the variable display times related to the second first notification, the display control means has a special effect (confrontation) different from the normal effect after the variable display times related to the first first notification are started. After displaying the effect), the effect content including the advantageous content (winning effect) suggesting that the privilege game will be executed and the non-advantageous content (defeat effect) suggesting that the privilege game will not be executed. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that one of the two is displayed.

According to the feature B3, since the special effect is displayed in the variable display times related to the second first notification, the player can continue the game while expecting the second first notification to occur.

Feature B4. When the second advance notification is notified to the notification means, the advance notification control means is special for a predetermined number of notification areas in the notification area in which the advance notification is performed after the second first notification. It has a special area setting means for setting an area (a function of setting a support zone EZ in MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
When the third advance notification is notified to a notification area different from the special area and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the advance notification replacement means and the first advance notification in the special area and the above. The third destination notification outside the special area is replaced with the notification means to notify the notification means.
When the variation display times related to the second destination notification are started, the display control means has the third destination notification in the special area if the third destination notification exists in the special area. The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized in that the special effect having a higher probability of becoming the advantageous content is displayed than when the special effect is not provided.

According to the feature B4, when the second first notification occurs, a special area is set, and there is a possibility that the first first notification in the special area and the third first notification outside the special area are exchanged and notified. It is possible to provide a new playability that there is. In addition, when the third advance notification exists in the special area, a special effect having a higher probability of being more advantageous than when the third advance notification does not exist in the special area is displayed, so that the player can display the third advance notification. When the 2nd destination notification occurs, the game is continued while expecting the 3rd destination notification to occur, and when the 3rd destination notification occurs, the 3rd destination notification is the 1st destination notification in the special area. Pay attention to the game while expecting that it will be replaced with. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

That is, when the configuration of the feature B4 is not provided, the special effect is displayed in the variation display time related to the second destination notification, so that when the player is notified of the second destination notification, the variation display time related to the second destination notification is displayed. There is a possibility of watching the game result until the start of. That is, when the second advance notification is notified, the player may not perform the act of causing the information acquisition means to acquire the special information.

On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature B4, when the third advance notification exists in the special area, there is a high probability that the content will be more advantageous than when the third advance notification does not exist in the special area. Is displayed, the game can be continued while expecting the player to generate the third first notification even after the second first notification is notified.

Feature B5. The advance notification replacement means determines that the second advance notification reflects the hit information, determines that the first advance notification that reflects the deviation information exists in the special area, and is predetermined. When the condition is satisfied, the first first notification that reflects the deviation information existing in the special area and the third first notification that exists outside the special area are exchanged and notified to the notification means. Features The gaming machine according to B4.

According to the feature B5, when the second first notification is the first notification that reflects the hit information, the third first notification outside the special area is replaced with the first first notification that reflects the out-of-order information in the special area. Therefore, when the third first notification occurs, the player pays more attention to the game while expecting that the third first notification is replaced with the first first notification in the special area. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Feature B6. The advance notification replacement means determines that the second advance notification reflects the deviation information, determines that the first advance notification that reflects the hit information exists in the special area, and determines in advance. When the above condition is satisfied, the first notification that reflects the hit information existing in the special area and the third notification outside the special area are exchanged and notified to the notification means. The gaming machine according to feature B4 or B5.

According to the feature B6, when the first first notification existing in the special area reflects the hit information, the third first notification outside the special area is replaced with the first first notification that reflects the hit information in the special area. Therefore, when the third first notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the third first notification is replaced with the first first notification in the special area. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the case of such a game machine, since it is determined that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant determination regarding the replaced third destination notification, the special effect is changed with respect to the third destination notification. It is preferable to extend the display to the display times.

Feature B7. The advance notification replacement means determines that the second advance notification reflects the deviation information, determines that the first advance notification in the special area is a notification that reflects the deviation information, and determines in advance. Features B4 to B6 characterized in that when the above conditions are satisfied, the first first notification existing in the special area and the third first notification outside the special area are exchanged and notified to the notification means. The gaming machine described in any one of.

According to the feature B7, even if the third first notification is replaced with the first first notification in the special area, it may not be determined that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group. For this reason, the existence of the third advance notification in the special area can be regarded as one effect in the game (so-called game chance-up effect), and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature B8. When the slave notification distribution means determines that the second first notification reflects the hit information, or determines that the first first notification in the special area has a notification that reflects the hit information. In addition, as the advance notification that reflects the next deviation information, the second advance notification reflects the deviation information, and the first advance notification in the special area also reflects only the advance notification that reflects the deviation information. The gaming machine according to the feature B4 to B7, wherein the probability of selecting the third advance notification is higher than that in the case of determining that.

According to the feature B8, when the second first notification that reflects the hit information exists, or when the first first notification that reflects the hit information exists in the special area, the third first notification is likely to occur. Therefore, the player can easily experience the game (directing) in which the third first notification outside the special area and the first first notification inside the special area are exchanged and notified. Further, in the variable display times related to the second first notification or the changed variable display times related to the third first notification (game times), the player is given a privilege game, so that the player can perform the first first notification and the first notification. It becomes easier to experience the excitement (expectation) caused by replacing the 3 advance notifications. Therefore, the player can be further focused on the game.

Feature B9. When the slave notification distribution means is a destination notification that reflects the deviation information, the first notification, the third notification, and the first notification are the first notifications other than the second notification. Select one from the first notification, the second first notification, and the first notification including the fourth first notification different from the third first notification.
The advance notification replacement means
When it is determined that at least one of the third advance notification or the fourth advance notification is notified by the notification means, and a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When it is determined that only the fourth first notification or only the first first notification exists in addition to the fourth first notification after the special area, the first first notification and the special area in the special area are present. The fourth destination notification outside is replaced with the notification means, and the notification means is notified.
When the third-first notification and the fourth-first notification are present after the special area, the first-first notification in the special area and the third-first notification or the fourth-first notification outside the special area are present. At least one of the notifications is replaced to notify the notification means.
When the variation display times related to the second destination notification are started, the display control means has the fourth destination notification in the special area if the fourth destination notification exists in the special area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4 to B8, characterized in that the special effect having a higher probability of becoming the advantageous content is displayed than when the special effect is not displayed.

According to the feature B9, since there is a possibility that the third-first notification and the fourth-first notification are notified by the notification means, it is possible to further diversify the game. Further, when the fourth advance notification exists in the special area, the probability that the content becomes more advantageous than when the fourth advance notification does not exist in the special area, for example, when the third advance notification exists in the special area. Since a special effect with a high probability is displayed, it is possible to further diversify the game.

Feature B10. When the slave notification distribution means is a advance notification that reflects the deviation information, it is determined that the third destination notification is being notified by the notification means, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized in that the fourth advance notification is selected.

According to the feature B10, the fourth first notification is notified only after the third first notification is notified, and the third first notification is performed when the fourth first notification exists in the special area. Since a special effect having a higher probability of being more advantageous than when it exists in the special area is displayed, the player can play the game while expecting the fourth first notification to occur even if the third first notification occurs. To continue. Then, when the fourth first notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the fourth first notification is replaced with the first first notification in the special area, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature B11. The notification means is a part of the pattern display means, and the advance notification is displayed on the pattern display means.
The display control means relates to the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification when the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification are displayed in the special area by the advance notification replacement means. After displaying the pre-special effect (confrontation effect), the third first notification becomes an advantageous content (winning effect), and the first effect (third first notification wins) included in the special effect, or the fourth destination The replacement effect means (display control device 93 is confronted with the hold notification symbol) in which the notification becomes an advantageous content (winning effect) and one of the second effects (fourth first notification wins) included in the special effect is displayed. It has a function of executing the effect), and when the variation display times related to the second advance notification are started, the special effect including the advance notification which is an advantageous content of the first effect and the second effect is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10.

According to the feature B11, when the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification exist in the special area, the advance special effect regarding the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification is displayed, so that the player can be affected. It is possible to pay attention to the advance special effects of the third advance notification and the fourth advance notification. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature B12. The advance notification replacement means is any one of features B1 to B11, characterized in that the notification means causes the notification means to replace or repeatedly replace the prior notifications that are continuous in the order of notification. The game machine described in.

According to the feature B12, continuous advance notifications (for example, first first notification and third first notification, first first notification and fourth first notification, etc.) are exchanged with each other in the order of notification. Therefore, the player can easily grasp which advance notification is replaced, and can suppress confusion due to the replacement of the prior notification. In addition, when the replacement of the prior notifications is repeated, the player can be given a game of predicting where the notification will be finally made (whether it will stop). In particular, when the configuration such as feature B4 is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the third advance notification (and the fourth advance notification) is notified as the advance notification in the special area. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Feature B13. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
An operation valid period determining means (a function of executing the operation valid lottery process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the operation valid period of the operating means, and
An operation notification means (a function of executing an operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for performing an operation notification by the notification means after determining the operation validity period is provided.
When it is determined that the operation means is operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determining means, the advance notification replacement means is said to be one of the predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B12, wherein the first notification is exchanged with the first notification and the first notification different from the second first notification to notify the notification means. ..

According to the feature B13, the operation notification for causing the player to operate the operation means is performed, and one of the conditions is that the player operates the operation means, the first first notification, the first first notification, and the second first notification. And different advance notifications (third and fourth advance notifications) are replaced. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the operation notification is generated when the advance notification different from the first first notification and the second first notification is generated. Then, when the operation notification occurs, the player operates the operation means to switch the first notification and the first notification different from the first notification and the second destination notification, so that the player can operate the operation. A game of operating means is added, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when the player does not want to generate a replacement effect in which the first advance notification and the advance notifications (third and fourth advance notifications) different from the first and second advance notifications are exchanged, the operation is performed. You can also choose not to operate the means. Therefore, when the configuration such as the feature B5 or B6 is provided, the player may detect that a hit is generated in advance by generating the replacement effect, or enjoy the effect without intentionally generating the replacement effect. You can choose. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Feature B14. When it is determined that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, the advance notification replacement means is said to be said. The feature B13 is described in feature B13, wherein after the operation valid period has elapsed, the first advance notification is exchanged with the first advance notification and the advance notification different from the second first notification to notify the notification means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature B14, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, after the operation valid period elapses after the operation notification is given, the first first notification, the first first notification, and the second The advance notification (third and fourth advance notification) different from the advance notification is replaced. Therefore, for example, when there is a second first notification that reflects the hit information as in feature B8, or when there is a first first notification that reflects the hit information in the special area, the third first notification is generated. When this is done, it is possible to suppress the loss of the significance of the third prior notification and to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the production.

Feature B15. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start opening 54) and a second start entry portion (second start opening 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided. Prepare,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry portion, and obtains the special information when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, which is characterized in that it is acquired.

According to the feature B15, since at least the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are provided as the start ball entry part, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased.

Feature B16. The game area is characterized by being provided with a game ball guidance unit (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering a game ball into the first start ball entry unit and the second start ball entry unit. Features The gaming machine according to B15.

According to the feature B16, the player can easily allow the game ball to alternately enter the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry portion by letting the game ball flow down into the game area. Therefore, special information can be efficiently acquired, and many grant determinations can be executed.

Feature B17. The game area has an entry port through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The game ball guiding unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction opposite to the first direction. In addition to guiding the game ball to the first starting ball entry portion, the game ball entered from the entry port is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to feature B16, wherein the gaming ball is guided to the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the feature B17, the game balls can be alternately distributed and guided to the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section by using a common member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts as compared with the case where the members for distributing the game balls are provided in the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section, respectively.

Feature B18. The game ball guiding portion is in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entered game ball and is predetermined in the second direction. The first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and the game ball that has entered the ball are in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive portion (accommodating portion 64b) that receives and rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive portion rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance. Prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive portion rotates in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance. The gaming machine according to feature B17, characterized in that the second passive portion has rotation regulating means (magnet 64c, base side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature B18, since the first passive portion and the second passive portion receive the game ball and rotate, the game ball then enters the ball entry port due to the rotation regulating means. Rotation is suppressed before the movement. That is, it is possible to suppress rotation without receiving the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently and alternately enter the game ball into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state is set. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Further, when the lottery result is a transition to the so-called winning game state, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed. The payout of game balls is executed according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is displaying a variable pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is a pachinko game machine that is supposed to be (held memory). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (for example). JP-A-2004-81853).

In such a game machine, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention of the player to the game, and the feature C group solves the problem.

Feature C1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that controls the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress process (timer interrupt process in each of the above embodiments).
An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value greater than 1, and
The grant determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information is executed, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In some cases, the grant determination means (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the plurality of the special information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game (for example, a long-time mode). A privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 56 in
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquisition information storage means is stored in the information corresponding to the determination result when the grant determination is the target, or in the acquisition information storage means. Destination specifying means (main control) that specifies information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice in MPU 112 of device 91) and
At a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the prior identification means becomes the target of the grant determination, the advance notification that reflects the specific result by the prior identification means is notified by the notification means (symbol display device 80). ) Is provided with advance notification control means (a function of executing the hold command corresponding process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying the hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
The advance notification control means
Based on the specific result by the specific result, the advance notification distribution means (the destination in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that selects one advance notification from a plurality of different advance notifications that reflects the specific result (A function to execute the process of distributing notifications) and
When at least two different advance notifications are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a replacement process is executed in which the advance notification is replaced with a predetermined combination and the notification means is notified. A gaming machine characterized by having a advance notification replacement means (a function of executing replacement processing of the voice lamp control device 92).

According to the feature C1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. Is notified by the notification means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order to be the target of the grant judgment is the target of the later special information is first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved. Further, when at least two different advance notifications are notified by the notification means, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the advance notifications may be replaced with a predetermined combination and notified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature C2. When the advance notification is replaced and notified by the advance notification replacement means in a predetermined combination, the expectation that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group is notified in the replaced advance notification. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it has a degree notification control means (a function of notifying the expected degree of the display control device 93).

According to the feature C2, when the advance notification is exchanged in a predetermined combination and notified, the degree of expectation that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group is notified. Therefore, since the player needs a plurality of advance notifications in order to form a predetermined combination, it becomes easy for the player to continue the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C3. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
An operation valid period determining means (a function of executing the operation valid lottery process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the operation valid period of the operating means, and
An operation notification means (a function of executing an operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for performing an operation notification by the notification means after determining the operation validity period is provided.
When it is determined that the operation means is operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determining means as one of the predetermined conditions, the advance notification replacement means is said to be the destination. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the notifications are exchanged in a predetermined order and the notification means are notified.

According to the feature C3, the operation notification for causing the player to operate the operation means is performed, and the advance notification is replaced in a predetermined order on condition that the player operates the operation means. For this reason, a game in which the player operates the operating means is added, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The player can also choose not to operate the operating means if he / she does not want to generate the replacement effect. Therefore, when the configuration of feature C2 is provided, the player selects whether to detect the expectation that a hit result will be generated in advance by generating the replacement effect, or to enjoy the effect without intentionally generating the replacement effect. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Feature C4. When it is determined that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation validity period determined by the operation validity period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, the advance notification replacement means is said to be said. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein after the operation valid period has elapsed, the advance notifications are replaced in a predetermined order and the notification means is notified.

According to the feature C4, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, the advance notification is replaced in a predetermined order after the operation valid period elapses after the operation notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the production.

Feature C5. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start opening 54) and a second start entry portion (second start opening 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided. Prepare,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry portion, and obtains the special information when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which is characterized in that it is acquired.

According to the feature C5, since at least the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are provided as the start ball entry part, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased.

Feature C6. The game area is characterized by being provided with a game ball guidance unit (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering a game ball into the first start ball entry unit and the second start ball entry unit. Features The gaming machine according to C5.

According to the feature C6, by letting the game ball flow down to the game area, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section alternately. Therefore, special information can be efficiently acquired, and many grant determinations can be executed.

Feature C7. The game area has an entry port through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The game ball guiding unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction opposite to the first direction. In addition to guiding the game ball to the first starting ball entry portion, the game ball entered from the entry port is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the gaming ball is guided to the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the feature C7, the game balls can be alternately distributed and guided to the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section by using a common member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts as compared with the case where the members for distributing the game balls are provided in the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section, respectively.

Feature C8. The game ball guiding portion is in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entered game ball and is predetermined in the second direction. The first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and the game ball that has entered the ball are in a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive portion (accommodating portion 64b) that receives and rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive portion rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance. Prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive portion rotates in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second passive portion has rotation regulating means (magnet 64c, base side magnet 65a) for preventing the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature C8, since the first passive portion and the second passive portion receive the game ball and rotate, then the game ball enters the ball entrance. Rotation is suppressed before the movement. That is, it is possible to suppress rotation without receiving the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently and alternately enter the game ball into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section.

Further, the basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.
<Others>
Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state when the gaming ball enters the starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery will be held. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Further, when the lottery result is a transition to the so-called winning game state, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed. The payout of game balls is executed according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.
In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is displaying a variable pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is a pachinko game machine that is supposed to be (held memory). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information after the variable display of the pattern is completed, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (for example). Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853).
By the way, in such a game machine, there is a device that notifies a player of information (holding information) used for a winning lottery (preliminary notification), and there is a device that further provides a plurality of notification methods. In such a game machine, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the game by further devising the method of notification.
In view of the above points, the present technical idea aims to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the information acquisition means for acquiring the special information based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition conditions and the special information acquired by the information acquisition means are obtained from 1. The acquisition information storage means that stores up to the specified number defined as a large integer value and the grant determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the validity information group in the grant information. When a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means for sequentially executing the grant determination for the plurality of special information and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means are A privilege granting means for granting a privilege game to a player based on the result of granting that the special information to be determined corresponds to a pass / fail information group, and an information storage means acquired by the information acquisition means. Judgment when the information corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information stored in is the target of the grant judgment, or when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant judgment The destination identification move that specifies the information corresponding to the result at the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant judgment, and the predetermined special information that is the target of the grant judgment by the destination identification means are the targets of the grant judgment. The advance notification control means is provided with the advance notification control means for making the advance notification reflecting the specific result by the prior identification means notified by the notification means having a plurality of notification areas at the timing before the above. Is a first notification distribution means that selects one of the first notification and the second first notification different from the first first notification and the second first notification that reflects the specific result based on the specific result by the first identification means. When the notification is notified by the notification means, it is a means to be executed with priority over the advance notification distribution means, and the predetermined special information specified by the prior identification means corresponds to the pass / fail information group. The predetermined special information when it is identified as being present is used as the hit information, and the predetermined special information when it is specified by the prior identification means that the predetermined special information which is the specific target does not correspond to the validity information group is specified. When the information is deviated information, the pre-notification that reflects the next deviated information includes the first pre-notification and the third pre-notification different from the first and second pre-notifications, and excludes the second pre-notification. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the case where the slave notification distribution means for selecting one of the advance notifications and the first and third advance notifications are notified by the notification means, the first Insert 1st notification and 3rd notification It is characterized in that it has a pre-notification replacement means for executing a replacement process for notifying the notification means instead.
<Effect>
According to this, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the grant determination is performed at the timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. It is notified by the notification means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order to be the target of the grant judgment is the target of the later special information is first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.
Further, when the third destination notification occurs, it is possible to provide a new game property that the third destination notification may be replaced with another first destination notification and notified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.
Further, when the third first notification occurs, the positional relationship (notification relationship) between the second first notification and the third first notification changes by replacing the third first notification with another first first notification. Therefore, the effect can be different depending on the positional relationship between the second first notification and the third first notification, and the player can confirm or predict the positional relationship between the third first notification and the second first notification. Is added. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
114b Special symbol holding ball storage area (storage means)
S310, S311, S312 Benefit granting means
S404 Part of information acquisition means
S405, S411 pre-determination means
S504 discrimination means
Part of S2013 destination display means

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means that can acquire information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A storage means that can store the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number, and a storage means.
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on the display means, and
In a gaming machine provided with a privilege giving means for giving a privilege game to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.
A pre-determination means capable of executing a pre-discrimination of the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed.
The display means is provided with a pre-display means capable of causing the display means to display a display mode for showing the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means for each result of the pre-determination.
The display position of the display mode displayed by the prior display means may be changed when the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result based on the information corresponding to the display mode is started. Has been made possible
In the display mode, a discrimination result in which the probability of being displayed when the information to be discriminated from the specific discrimination result is pre-determined by the pre-discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result and the pre-determination. When the pre-determination means preliminarily determines that the first display mode is set higher than the pre-determination by the discrimination means and the information is determined to be a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. At least, the second display mode and the third display mode, which are set to have a higher probability of being displayed than the first display mode, are set.
The game machine is displayed based on the first display mode and the information that is determined to be the specific determination result by the determination means in advance by the advance determination means . The second display mode displayed at the display position indicating that the dynamic display is started prior to the first display mode is determined by the discrimination means to be different from the specific discrimination result. The information is displayed at a display position indicating that the dynamic display is started before the first display mode, which is displayed based on the pre-determination by the pre-determination means. When the three display modes are displayed, it is possible to switch the display positions of the second display mode and the three display modes at a timing different from the timing at which the dynamic display of the identification information is started. A game machine characterized by being provided with various means.

Images